This is a digital copy of a book that was preserved for generations on library shelves before it was carefully scanned by Google as part of a project
to make the world's books discoverable online.
It has survived long enough for the copyright to expire and the book to enter the public domain. A public domain book is one that was never subject
to copyright or whose legal copyright term has expired. Whether a book is in the public domain may vary country to country. Public domain books
are our gateways to the past, representing a wealth of history, culture and knowledge that's often difficult to discover.
Marks, notations and other marginalia present in the original volume will appear in this file - a reminder of this book's long journey from the
publisher to a library and finally to you.
Usage guidelines
Google is proud to partner with libraries to digitize public domain materials and make them widely accessible. Public domain books belong to the
public and we are merely their custodians. Nevertheless, this work is expensive, so in order to keep providing this resource, we have taken steps to
prevent abuse by commercial parties, including placing technical restrictions on automated querying.
We also ask that you:
+ Make non-commercial use of the files We designed Google Book Search for use by individuals, and we request that you use these files for
personal, non-commercial purposes.
+ Refrain from automated querying Do not send automated queries of any sort to Google's system: If you are conducting research on machine
translation, optical character recognition or other areas where access to a large amount of text is helpful, please contact us. We encourage the
use of public domain materials for these purposes and may be able to help.
+ Maintain attribution The Google "watermark" you see on each file is essential for informing people about this project and helping them find
additional materials through Google Book Search. Please do not remove it.
+ Keep it legal Whatever your use, remember that you are responsible for ensuring that what you are doing is legal. Do not assume that just
because we believe a book is in the public domain for users in the United States, that the work is also in the public domain for users in other
countries. Whether a book is still in copyright varies from country to country, and we can't offer guidance on whether any specific use of
any specific book is allowed. Please do not assume that a book's appearance in Google Book Search means it can be used in any manner
anywhere in the world. Copyright infringement liability can be quite severe.
About Google Book Search
Google's mission is to organize the world's information and to make it universally accessible and useful. Google Book Search helps readers
discover the world's books while helping authors and publishers reach new audiences. You can search through the full text of this book on the web
at http : //books . google . com/|
■%
m
itl
m
Oceania
D. Macdonald
«,
1
ii> It
iSr^
^f
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
Digitized by CjOPt ^LP
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
OCEANIA:
LINGUISTIC AND ANTHROPOLOGICAL
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
OCEANIA:
LINGUISTIC AND ANTHROPOLOGICAL.
BY
THE REV. D MACDONALD,
HAVANNAH HARBOUR, NEW HEBRIDES.
With Seven lUustralioiis and a Comparative Table
of Alphabetic Characters.
MELBOURNE : M. L. HUTCHINSON.
LONDON : SAMPSON LOW, MARSTON, SEARLE AND
RIVINGTON LIMITED.
1889.
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
DEDICATION.
I DEDICATE THIS WORK TO
CHRISTIAN MISSIONS.
D. MACDONALD.
13th March, 1889.
308718
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
CONTENTS
CHAPTER I.
Inteoductoey.
Page
Oceania — Race varieties, the Negroid and Mongoloid
— Original home in Asia of the Oceanic race — Malayo-
Polynesian or Oceanic linguistic family, branches, and
dialects — The Asiatic family, of which the Oceanic is
a branch — Labours and views of Humboldt, Bopp,
Craufurd, Grabelentz, Max MuUer, F. Midler, Wallace,
and Renan . . . . . . 1
CHAPTER II.
The Semitic-Oceanic Alphabetical Chaeactebs,
Consonants, and Lettee Changes.
Humboldt and Harrison on the Oceanic alphabetic charac-
ters — Not Indian but Phoenician or Babylonian — Com-
parative table — Transliteration — Vowels and Conso-
nants and their changes — Hale's table — Influence of
the accent . . . . . . . . 16
CHAPTER III.
Peonominal Woeds and Paeticles.
stem- words not roots but formed words, and bisyllabic —
Demonstrative particles — Personal pronouns . . 31
CHAPTER IV.
Peepositions and the Aeticle.
Article and preposition combined — Prepositions — The
article — ^Unconscious and double article . . . . 47
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
X CONTENTS.
CHAPTER V.
The Relative and Intekrogative.
Page
The Relative — Interrogative — Indefinite — Reflexive . . 62
CHAPTER YI.
Adverbial Particles and Conjunctions.
Adverbs of place — Directives — Interrogatives — Negation
— Conjugations — Interjections . . . . 66
CHAPTER VII.
Auxiliaries and Particles of Tense.
Verbs substantive — Pronominals— Prepositions — Conjunc-
tions — Particles of mood . . . . . . . . 73
CHAPTER VIII.
Formative Particles of the Derived Verb Stems.
Causative — Reflexive — Reflexive-Causative — Causative-Re-
flexive — Reduplication — Denominatives . . . . 79
CHAPTER IX.
Formative Particles of the Verbal Noun.
Adjective endings — Substantive endings, modem, ancient
— Combination of the modem with the ancient
fossilized endings — Transitive ending or preposition . . 90
CHAPTER X.
Nouns, Adjectives, and Verbs.
Comparison of modem with ancient words, showing use
of Adjectives and Substantive endings . . . . 103
CHAPTER XI.
The Numerals.
Cardinals — Ordinals — ^Denominatives .. .. ..115
CHAPTER XII.
Some Fundamental Words.
Man, "Woman, Father, Mother, Eye, Hand, &c. . . 123
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
CONTENTS. XI
CHAPTER XIII.
Some Fundamental Words, Continued.
Page
Heaven, Sun, &c. . . . . . . . . • • 135
CHAPTER XIV.
Some Fundamental Words, Continued.
Animals and Plants, &c. . . . . . . . . 145
CHAPTER XV.
Some Fundamental Words, Continued.
Writing, Navigation, Religion . . . . . . 152
CHAPTER XVI.
Some Fundamental Words, Continued.
Names of God in the Pacific and in Madagascar — Idols
and mythological beings — Wot — Maui — Tiki —
Maui tikitiki. Sacred stones . . . . . . 165
CHAPTER XVII.
The Oceanic Family and Relationship System.
Baal -worship — Ceremonial and sexual uncleanness — Reli-
gious purification — Incest — The family and the clan —
Prohibitions of intercourse and marriage — Relation of
the father and of the mother to their children — Names
of children — Underlying ideas of the Oceanic system
and corrupting influences of polygamy — ^The system a
degradation, not a development— Views of Sir John
Lubbock erroneous — Comparison with the ancient
pagan Semitic system — Levirate— The primitive sys-
tem of mankind — The family the foundation of
human society or civilization — A corrupt family sys-
tem one of the great obstacles to Christian missions in
the heathen world — ^The social degradation in Oceania
natural, though lamentable — " Savages" — Witchcraft,
infanticide, ** wreckers," burying alive the aged, licen-
tiousness, cannibalism {its origin) . . . . . . 179
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
XU CONTENTS.
CHAPTER XVIII.
Religion, Moeality, astd Law among -the Oceaioans.
Page
The deities of the savage — Not purely destructive— Very
much as in the ancient heathen world — Natemate
worship of the Oceanians and the ancient Semitic
paganism — The tomb the temple — The spirits of
deceased ancestors gradually put in the place of God
— Religion and morality among savages— The morality
of the Oceanian savage, such as it is, entirely founded
on his religion — The ideas of duty among savages —
Taboo — The ** Sacred Man" — Religion the very life
of the Oceanian savage — Rewards and punishments,
in this world and in the world to come, among the
savages — Humanizing effect of the religion of the
savage — Origin of the Oceanic myths, and of their
ideas respecting incest, heaven, and the future world
— The primitive religion of mankind — Undeniable
traces of it, and degradations from it in Oceania —
Happy effect upon the Oceanians of the primitive
religion in the shape of Christianity . . . . 198
CHAPTER XIX.
Ancient History and Oceanic Tradition . . . . 213
Note. — For a more particular account of the Efatese language,
see the work by the present writer, published simultaneously with
this, entitled " Three T w Hebrides Languages (Efatese,
Eromangan, Santo)," printed at the expense of the Melbourne
Public Library.
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
OCEANIA.
CHAPTER I.
Introductory.
The island world of Oceania may be roughly described
as lying in the vast ocean spaces that stretch between
Africa, Australia, America, and Asia, extending from
Madagascar to Easter Island — from Sumatra, through
New Guinea, to the New Hebrides, and from New
Zealand to the Sandwich Islands. The aboriginal
inhabitants of this island world, who are numbered
by tens of millions, all, with possible trifling excep-
tions, speak dialects or languages which belong to
one stock, and constitute the well-known Malayo-
Polynesian or Oceanic linguistic family. But while
homogeneous as to language, and substantially also as
to religion, manners, and customs, they vary con-
siderably 'as to physique — in some places presenting a
Negroid, in others a Mongoloid aspect. The Negroid
Oceanians, however, are not Negroes, nor the Mongoloid
Oceanians Mongols: they are modifications of the
Oceanic race, caused by its intermixture with or
absorption of African Negroes on the one hand and
Asiatic Mongols on the other. Both the Negro and
2
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
2 OCEANIA.
the Mongol, in passing into the Oceanic race, left bis
language behind, which disappeared, while printing
in durable characters his racial physique, the only
remaining record of the transaction. But the Oceanic
race thus had the organs of speech to some extent
modified, and the language was therefore no longer
spoken with the same purity of sound as before.
The change in the physique of the race carried with
it a change in the phonesis or physique of the
language.
The Negro element in the Oceanic race had been
introduced earlier than the Mongol : it is more
universally diffused*, occurring in Madagascar, Malaysia,
and the Pacific; and in those islands in Malaysia
where both the Negroid and Mongoloid Oceanians are
found, the former are regarded as the more aboriginal
or ancient, and dwell in the inland parts, while the
latter prevail upon the coasts ; and the Mongoloid
element decreases in quantity, generally speaking, in
proportion to the distance into Oceania from the south-
eastern extremity of Asia, as well as to that from the
coast into the interior of the larger islands. The
Oceanians are physically considered a mixed race.
Even in the same small village, in an island, great
variety may often be observed in the hair, colour, and
features of the inhabitants. The race varieties are
not separated by definite and fixed lines, but shade off
imperceptibly the one into the other. " The Malay
races," says De Quatrefages, "are the result of the
amalgamation, in different proportions, of whites.
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
INTRODUCTORY. 3
yellows, and blacks." " I believe," says Wallace, " that
the brown and the black, the Papuan, the natives of
Oilolo and Ceram, the Fijian^ the inhabitants of the
Sandwich Islands and those of New Zealand, are all
varying forms of one great Oceanic or Polynesian
race." Without entering into the uninviting task of
enumerating the endless diversities of opinion, or
rather conjectures, as to the race-varieties of Oceania,
it may suffice to say that the view here taken is that
the Oceanic race, or the race speaking Oceanic or
Malayo-Polynesian, originally came into Oceania from
Arabia or neighbourhood, on the one hand proceeding
along the east coast of Africa to Madagascar, on the
other along the southern coast of Asia to Malaysia ;
that it was a mixed race even before leaving Arabia,
and more or less Negroid, and that it became still
more mixed after its settlement in Malaysia through
physical contact with the neighbouring Asiatic Mon-
gols and other neighbouring Asiatics. In speaking of
the varying forms of the Oceanic race, it does not seem
necessary here to say more. Everyone will under-
stand that the crosses have been innumerable, and
that there is no end to the variety of shades of differ-
ence that have been, or that may be, produced, and
that the islands and islets afford homes, with the oceab
and savage customs preserving them as a wall from
outside influences, for the perpetuation of the produced
varieties. In Oceania the race has, in the course of
untold ages and unparalleled migi^ations from island
to island, over inhospitable seas, assumed varying
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
4 OCEANIA.
forms, the three fundamental elements being the white,
the black, and the yellow ; and the Oceanic mother
tongue has become broken up into innumerable
dialects. But the physical form of the race has varied
more rapidly and radically than the language type.
Without any help from the study of the race forms,
or varieties, we can ascertain and prove scientifically
— and it has been ascertained and proved scientifically
— that the vast multitude of dialects of Oceania belong
to one stock, or are sprung from one ancient mother
tongue. See for the proof of this F. Muller's Gh^nd-
riss der SprachwiaaeTichaft, Wien, 1882 (and c/ his
Reise der Fregatte Novara, Wien, 1867). On the
other hand, to the study of the race-varieties, it is
absolutely necessary to duly take into consideration
the linguistic facts that have been scientifically estab-
lished. It is the not doing this, for instance, that
made it possible for the distinguished naturalist
Wallace to assert the radical difierence as to race
between the Malays and the Pacific Islanders, who are
homogeneous as to language, and the radical identity
as to race of the Malays and Mongols, who have, as to
language, nothing in common. Even apart from lin-
guistic facts, however, these opinions of Wallace as to
Oceanic race questions have not commended them-
selves to general acceptance. It could easily be shown
that, apart from language, there is a closer afiinity of
race between the Malay and the Papuan than between
the Malay and the Mongol ; for instance, the descrip-
tion which Wallace himself gives of the Malay
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
INTRODUCTORY. 5
character and manners {My. Archip., pp. 584-5)
applies in every particular to the Papuan of the New
Hebrides; but when the linguistic facts are taken
into consideration the evidence is irresistible that the
Malay and Papuan are simply varying forms of the
one Oceanic race, and that the Malay is not Mongol,
but partly Mongoloid, as the Papuan is not Negro,
but Negroid (hence sometimes called Oriental Negro,
Negrillo, &;c. — names that should be disused).
F. Muller, in the works cited, which are the best or
standard works on the Oceanic languages, has duly
acknowledged the labours of the renowned scholars
and investigators who preceded him,. and made his
works possible, as the great work of Wm. von
Humboldt, Uber d'le Kawi Sprache, and that of H. C.
von der Gabelentz, Die Melanesischen Sprachen nach
ihreTn Oranimatischen Bau und ihrer Verwandtschaft
unter sich und mit den Malaiisch-Polynesischen
Sprachen, It is only recently that the Papuan
languages of the Western Pacific have become
thoroughly known. In the old days, when they were
little known, the opinion was commonly held that
they were different among themselves, or belonging
to different stocks, as well as radically different from
the better known Oceanic. Crawfurd made himself
an exponent of these crude notions. They, however,
have vanished before the light of advancing knowledge,
though there are still, it seems, some people who cling
to them, among others A. H. Keane, Professor of Hindu-
stani, University College, London, a man of whom,
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
6 OCEANIA.
from his position, we might expect better things. The
obscurity which has been dispelled from the Papuan
groups of the Western Pacific still remains upon the
more inaccessible or less known parts of New Guinea.
But the Motu language of New Guinea, of which the
Rev. Mr. Lawes has recently published a grammar and
dictionary, certainly belongs to the Oceanic family.
Nothing that may be discovered in New Guinea, or
any other part of Oceania, hereafter, can alter the fact
that the vast body of the Oceanic race, in its varying
physical forms, speak dialects or languages of the one
Oceanic or Malayo-Polynesian family. Possibly, at
a very ancient period, the Oceanic race occupied
Ceylon and the Maldives, and that both the race and
their language were swept out of these places by
eruption of the s warming hordes of the Asiatic neigh-
bourhood, and it is possible that unimportant places
may yet be found in Central Oceania as to which it
shall be ascertained that a somewhat similar process
has taken place.
The Oceanic has been described by F. MuUer, who
calls it the Malayo-Polynesian, as divided into four
great branches- or groups: — 1. The Tagalan, of which
the Malagasy is a type, comprising the Tagala, Bisaya,
Formosa, Marianne, &c. 2. The Malayan, of which
the Malay is a type, comprising the Malay, Javanese,
Battak, Bugis, Dayak, &c. 3. The Papuan (called by
Muller Melanesian), of which the Efatese is a type,
comprising the Fiji, Aneityum, Tanna, Eromanga,
Efatese, Mallicolo, Baladea, Gaudalcanar, &c. ; and.
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
INTRODUCTORY. 7
4. The Maori-Hawaiian (called by MuUer the Poly-
nesian, by others the Sawaiori), of which the Samoan
is a type, comprising the Samoan, Tongan, Hawaiian,
Maori, &c. It is likely enough that, as knowledge
advances, a fifth group may have to be added to
these. It should be observed that the names,
Malagasy, Malay, Papuan, and Maori-Hawaiian, used
in this connection, are purely linguistic. It is true
that the Papuan speakers have generally a Negroid
aspect, but some are light in colour, and have straight
hair and features neither Negroid nor Mongoloid ;
the Maori-Hawaiian speakers in some cases, but not
generally,have a Negroid aspect. Among the speakers
of the dialects called Tagalan and Malay, some present
a Mongoloid, some a Negroid aspect, and some neither :
the names do not denote that there is any race
variety corresponding to each group of dialects. And
even linguistically this division of the Oceanic dialects
into four groups must be taken only for what it is
worth. The original mother tongue was not divided
into four secondary mother tongues, of which these
four groups are the respective descendants. But all
the dialects have equally sprung from the same
source, and have become what they are in the natural
course of dialectic variation among peoples who have
gradually been becoming separated and isolated from
each other, and sinking in the outlying islands into
deeper and deeper savagery. In Madagascar and
Malaysia the dialects are not so numerous in propor-
tion to the population, and they are not so poor in
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
8 OCEANIA.
vocabulary, grammar, and phonesis as those in the
Pacific. The Malay is poorer in grammar, or more
analytic, than the Malagasy, because the Malays have
been constantly in greater contact with foreign
peoples by trade and otherwise, and such contact
accelerates the analytic process. That process has
been in constant operation in Oceania from the
time when it was spoken as the mother tongue
by the first fathers of the Oceanians in their
original home or mother-land down to the present
day, when we find it in numberless dialects spoken
by their descendants scattered over the vast ocean-
world, and without historical records, some of them
completely isolated from all outside influences, and
lapsed into cannibalism and savagery — some of
them, as in Java, in close contact with Asia, and
exhibiting in their architectural ruins and in their
legends the proofs of large intercourse with India, and
in the structure of their bodies the proofs of
physical intermixture with the Mongols of South-
Eastem Asia. To accurately measure the time that
has elapsed since the first migration of the Oceanic
fathers from Arabia by years is, in the absence of
historical records, not possible* But there is every
reason to believe that it is not less than three thousand^
and there is no reason to believe that it is more than
four thousand years. We may, therefore, conjecture
that the Oceanic fathers from Arabia or neighbourhood
immigrated into Oceania nearly 4,000 years ago, carry-
ing their speech — ^the mother tongue of the Oceanic —
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
INTRODUCTORY. 9
with them. As they became separated and scattered
their dialects multiplied; and while the analytic process
prevailed universally, the pronunciation and grammar
becoming simplified and the grammar gradually
giving place to syntactical equivalents, it naturally
went forward more rapidly in some dialects than in
others. The Malagasy is actually found now (and the
Tagala) not so analytic as the Malay ; the {ormer,
favourably situated, has been like a house sheltered
from storms and subject only to gradual decay, the
latter, from its position, close to Indo-China, like a
house exposed to storms. The Pacific islanders are
the outcasts of the Oceanic race. Their* dialects are
as far advanced analytically as the Malayan, and, in
some cases, further. The Maori-Hawaiian speakers
are commonly supposed to have come into the
Pacific from Malaysia about, or shortly after, the
beginning of the Christian era, and settled first in
Samoa and Tonga, thence migrating to Tahiti and the
Sandwich Islands, and to Raratonga and New Zealand;
and, in the present century, in drifting canoes, to the
New Hebrides, where small communities of them are
found in the islands of Fotuna, Aniwa, Meli and Fila,
and Mai. The last such canoe came to Mai about
thirty or forty years ago with a large number of
people on board, who had a musket, and who were all
killed except one or two. A piece of that canoe is in
my possession. It was a superior vessel, and had
drifted, with its living freight, across 1,500 miles of
ocean. The Maori-Hawaiian speakers of the New
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
10 OCEANIA.
Hebrides, while they have retained their speech
unchanged, or only changed in pronunciation, have
changed remarkably in physique, some of them pre-
senting the aspect of the Negroid Oceanian. The
causes of that change are patent. The Papuan
speakers of the Pacific have come from Malaysia,
which they left, earlier than the Maori-Hawaiian
speakers, and gradually into the Western Pacific by
way of the continuous chain of islands that extends
from New Guinea to the New Hebrides and Fiji.
The Papuan dialects are more numerous and diversi-
fied than the Maori-Hawaiian (Ma.-Ha.) The Ma.-Ha.
speakers are Comparatively few.
The Malagasy (Mg.) has retained more of the gram-
matical forms or formative processes of the ancient
mother tongue than the Malay or the Pacific dialects.
As to the almost complete substitution of syntactical
for grammatical processes, it is on the same level with
them. It is only in this sense that the Mg. repre-
sents more perfectly the common mother tongue.
The Malay has the most extensive vocabulary, and
the largest number of introduced words, among which
are a considerable number of Sanscrit and Arabic
words, the latter due to the Mahommedan Arabs, and
more recently introduced than the former. The
Sanscrit and Mod. Arabic words in the Mg. ai-e ex-
ceedingly few, especially the former (if there are any
at all of them). No Mod. Arabic words have been
found in the Pacific, and whether there are any
Sanscrit words there is an interesting point that yet
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
INTRODUCTORY. 11
9
awaits investigation. Probably a few may be
found, but very few. Of some of the words in the
Malay which are commonly said to be Sanscrit it is
doubtful whether they are Sanscrit or Oceanic. The
Ma.-Ha. speakers have more civilization and a larger
vocabulary than the Papuan speakers. Among the
latter the Fijian superiority in civilization is probably
due to intermixture with the neighbouring Ma.-
Hawaiians. In the matter of pronunciation, the Ma.-
Ha. dialects have departed furthest from the original
tongue by phonetic decay or simplification. The
dialects of Madagascar on the one hand, and of the
Pacific on the other, have a more archaic aspect, or
are more purely Oceanic than the Malay. That all
the dialects of Oceanic are sprung from one inflectional
mother tongue, as are all the modern dialects of Indo-
European, or as are all the modern dialects of Semitic,
is manifest from the substantial identity of their
structure, materia), phonesis, and syntax ; they have
the same inflectional or formative particles (prefix,
infix, and suffix) and reduplications, the same syntac-
tical particles (demonstratives, prepositions, and con-
junctions), the same words denoting the principal
objects of external nature, the members of the human
body, and the operations, of the human mind in the
sphere of religion, in the sphere of family life, and in
the sphere of social life, the same pronouns, numemls,
adjectives, and adverbs. The phonetic changes are
perfectly natural in the peculiar circumstances (lapse
of time, number of dialects, complete isolation, together
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
12 OCEANIA.
with absence of conserving influences of civilized
government exercised over vast countries, and of
writing, or a standard literary language), looked at
from the standpoint of the Semitic philology, and
may best and most briefly be described as taking
place according to the laws of dialectic variation
and phonetic decay, as recognized in the ancient and
modern dialects of the Semitic family. It will appear
below that in the particulai-s enumerated in the sen-
tence preceding this, the Oceanic (Oc.) is as certainly
related to the Semitic as the various Oc. dialects are
to one another — that isj that the Oceanic, the Arabic,
Ethiopian, Amharic, Tigme, Assyrian, Syrian, Chaldee,
Modem Syrian, Hebrew, and Phoenician are all sprung
from one stock or mother tongue, and together constitute
one family. It is necessary to bear in mind that this
is purely linguistic, and must be treated as such,
without help and without hindrance from questions
or assertions as to race- varieties or social conditions.
It would be inadmissible to argue from the fact that
some Oceanians have a Semitic (Se.) physique, that
therefore their language is Se., and it would be equally
inadmissible to say that because some of them have
not a Semitic physique therefore their language
is not Se. Everyone knows that community of
language is one thing and that of unmixed race
another. The Semitic speaking peoples, as a rule,
have not been pure but mixed races, from the earliest
recorded times. For instance, manj^ Semitic-speaking
people now in Arabia and neighbourhood present a
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
INTRODUCTORY 13
Negroid aspect. And as to social condition, some
Se. speaking people now in the same localities are
not much, if at all, higher than some of the Oceanians,
and Gibbon remarks of some of the ancient Arabs that
they w6re mere savages, and even cannibals, ever on
the verge of starvation. Yet we find a writer like
Benan, in his Hiatoire des Langues Semitiques,
making the following extraordinary statement : — " As
to the inferior races ... of Oceania ... to
imagine a savage race speaking a Semitic or Indo-
European language is a contradictory figment to which
every person initiated in the laws of comparative
philology shall refuse to lend himself." Kenan in-
forms us that his valuable though somewhat preten-
tious work was written ** to do for the Semitic lan-
guages what M. Bopp has done for the Indo-European,"
and on a subsequent page he has approvingly written
" en fait de langues, dit Guillaume de Humboldt, il
faut se garder d'assertions generales," and he must
have known that of these two world-renowned
masters in comparative philology Humboldt was in-
clined to think, and Bopp wrote an elaborate essay to
prove, the Oceanic Indo-European (Uher die Ver-
wandtschaft der Malayisch-Polyneaischen Sprachen
mitdenlndisch'Europdischenvon Franz Bopp, Berlin,
1841). Max MuUer (in Bunsen's Christianity and
Mankind) has suggested that the linguistic connec-
tion is between Oceania and not India, but the Indo-
Chinese peninsula, and that Oceanic is Turanian or
agglutinative. F. MuUer has shown (Reiae der F,
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
14 OCEANIA.
Nov.y pp. 273-8) that both Bopp and Max MuIIer have
totally failed in the attempt to establish, linguistically,
the one a connection between Oc. and In.-Europ.,
the other a connection between Oc. and Turanian.
Whitney has given the conclusion of F. MuUer and of
European science in these words — '* From what central
point the migrations of the tribes and their dialects
took place it is not possible to tell The family is
strictly an insular one" (Life and 0. of Lang.,
London, 1880.)
The world of Oceania lies before us like a vast
hieroglyphic record, the deciphering of which will
throw light upon the history of the human race and
upon the deepest questions of modem thought : the
illustrious scholars who have laboured, without success,
to find the key to unlock the mysterious record merit
our warmest gratitude. Their labours stand not as
barriers to the subsequent investigator, resisting pro-
gress and forbidding hope; but as lighthouses, shedding,
far across trackless waves, light, whose every beam is
pregnant at once with friendly warning and noble
encouragement.
The view here taken is that the ancient Oceanic
mother tongue was a branch of the Semitic family,
just as Ethiopic, Himyaritic, Arabic, Hebrew, Syriac,
Chaldee, Phoenician, and Assyrian, and that while,
like each of these, it had much in common with all
the rest of phonesis, grammar, and vocabulary, it had
also, like each of these, something of phonesis, gram-
mar, and vocabulary peculiar to itself, and that the
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
INTRODUCTORY. 15
modern Oc. dialects are Neo-Semitic, somewhat as are,
for instance, Modern Syriac, Amharic, and Tigre. The
ancient mother tongue of the Semitic is lost, and we
can know it only from its descendants, the Arabic,
&c. ; the ancient mother tongue of the Oceanic is also
lost, and we can know it only from its descendants,
the Malagasy, &c. From these decendants we learn
that the Oceanic mother tongue had the Semitic stock
of triliteral words and of one-syllable formative par-
ticles ; the Semitic internal vowel inflection, and the
inflection of case (construct state), of number (dual and
plural endings), and of gender (feminine ending), and
of the perfect and imperfect of verbs, and of the verbal
nouns (participle and infinitive, or verbal adjectives
and verbal substantives), the Semitic article, and
Semitic phonesis. In order to prove this we have to
duly compare the known Oceanic with the known
Semitic dialects ; and I shall take, as the most con-
venient way to do this, four Oceanic dialects, one to
represent each of the four great groups into which the
family is divided — ^namely, the Malagasy (Mg.), the
Malay (My.), the Efatese (Ef.), and the Samoan
(Sam.) for the one side of the comparison, and all
known Semitic dialects for the other. The whole
family, embracing the dialects of both sides, I shall
name the Semitic-Oceanic (Se.-Oc.)
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
CHAPTER II.
The Se.-Oc. Alphabetic Characters, Consonants,
AND Letter Changes.
The Oceanic written alphabetic characters, as seen in
varying forms in Sumatra, in the Battak, Korinchi,
Rejang, and Lampung ; in Java, in the Javanese ; in
the Celebes, in the Makassar and the Bugis ; and in
the Philipfines, in the Tagala alphabet, are. thus
spoken of by Humboldt (Lettre a Mr, Jacqiiea, sur
les Alphabets de la Polynesie Asiatique) — "It is,
then, perhaps, more just to say that these (Oceanic)
alphabets are of unknown origin, that their prototype
must be of a high antiquity, and that it has served
for the basis of the Devanagari itself." They are,
certainly, derived either directly from the " Phcenician,
or more rightly, Babylonian" or indirectly from the
same through the earliest written alphabet of India,
which itself was derived from the Phoenician (com-
pare on this subject the works of F. MuUer, above
cited, for his views). So far as I can see, the evidence
available, that is, a comparison of the actual written
characters. Oceanic, ancient Indian, and Phoenician,
is decidedly in favour of the view that the Oceanic
characters are directly, and not by way of the Indian
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
THE SE.-OC. ALPHABETIC CHARACTER^, ETC. 17
modification, derived from the Phoenician. I am able
to refer, in support of this statement, not only to the
following comparative table of Oceanic and Phoenician
alphabetic characters, but also to the fourth volume
of the Journal of the Anthropological Inatitutey
in which there is an interesting paper by Mr. J. P.
Harrison on " Phoenician Characters from Sumatra,"
with a plate in which the Sumatran (Bejang) and
Phoenician characters are exhibited side by side.
Mr. Harrison remarks that " nearly the whole of the
letters . . . are identical in form with Phoenician
characters, mostly of a pure period," and that " both
in Java . . . and Sumatra . . . written
traditions, mixed with fable, refer to the arrival of
ships in remote times, and at two different epochs,
from the Red Sea and the Persian Gulf — in the one
case when vessels still coasted round the Bay of
Bengal ; in the other, in the age of Alexander, who is
said to have built a bridge *in the sea,' which may
mean that ships commanded by some of his officers
arrived direct from India. Three of his descendants
are also said to have become kings of Palembang, &c.
The ships would have been manned principally by
Phoenician sailors. Stripped of legendary matter,
there seems nothing contrary to or inconsistent with
history in these traditions." In addition to the forms
of the alphabetic characters modernly used by the
Oceanians, there are more ancient forms of the same
found inscribed on rocks or stones in the Malay
Archipelago. While the Oceanic alphabets funda-
3
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
18 OCEANIA.
mentally are directly Phoenician, slight Indian modi-
fications may have been added to them, especially in
Java and immediate neighbourhood, in more recent
times. The modern Malays have adopted, instead of
the Oc. alphabet, the modern Arabic introduced by
the Mahommedan Arabs. The Mg., Ef., and Sam.
have been reduced to writing by Europeans, and are
written in the Roman character. If the Se. alphabet
had been invented (as is not unlikely) before the first
peopling of Oceania by the Oceanic fathers, then
they probably brought their alphabetic characters
with them to the Malay Archipelago ; in that case we
have in Oceania the only part of the world where the
original Se. alphabet has been in use from about the
time of its invention to the present day by a Se.
speaking people. However this may be, it is quite
certain that no living alphabet of the present day is
so like to the Phoenician — the great mother alphabet
of all the world's alphabets — as the Oceanic.
In the subjoined table the Hebrew characters are
given as representing the original stock of Semitic
consonants : —
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
THE SE.-OC. ALPHABETIC CHARACTERS, ETC. 19
12 8 4 6
Eng. Heb. Rom. Phoen. Oceanic.
A ^ a, ' K y- Korinchi
^ 3 ^v '^ / Rejang
<> ^ « ^ ^ Korinchi
D "1 d ^ <y Makassar
H r\ h tf ;-i7 Battai
W 1 w,u(o) 7 ^^^ Bugis, >Lampung
Z \ z t- f^ Korinchi (j)
(Kh) n h ^ '^'71 Battak(h), »Lampimg(k)
^ ^ * i'vly ^^F Tagala(d,r)
Y ^ y, i (e) /T/I^ ^^ Bugis, -Lampung
K 3^nEth.,k >| ^P>-^ Battak, *Tagala (g)
L ^ \ tj ^^ Rejang
M 153 m X X Rejang
S D 8 ^ ^ Bugis
N ^ n ^ H Lampung
(0) J) « r <=> Battak (vowel
^ B,fl P»f ) ^ Bugis
Ts XV S /> "^ Battak (s)
Q p k /^ ^ Makassar
R T r 7 5 Lampung
8h gf sh, s <-#7 5*-^^ Lampung (ch or tsh)
Th, t n th, t Z ^T^ Lampung, 'Tagala
In the above table column 3 shows how the
original Se. letters are expressed in the Roman
characters. In addition it is necessary to give the
transliteration of the following peculiar Arabic letters
— namely, that connected with J, and pronounced
usually as g (in gmh), but dialectically also as i (gf in
get)^ for which I shall use g or j, that connected with
n, tK that connected with H, M (like cA in Scotch
locK), th§,t connected with "7, d (like th in ihit), that
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
20 OCEANIA.
connected with X, dh (like th in this), that connected
with tD, th " pronounced like a strongly-articulated
palatal zl' sometimes as dh, that connected with B, ",
" a guttural gr," * being a kind of guttural A, and in
some Se. dialects a mere breathing or vowel. Compare
the table of Se. alphabets in Ges. HeK Diet The
Arabic letter cZA, th, are usually pronounced by the
Malays in Arabic words modernly introduced as dl,
or I (nearly) ; we shall see below that these and the
Se. cognate letters are often represented by I, r, dr,
&c., in the most ancient Oc. words.
Powers of the Roman characters. It is to be noted
that in Ef. and Sam. books written by the missionaries
g (in the following sometimes written ng) represents
the sound of ng in the English aiTig ; that in Ef . also
h represents both h and p; f both / and v ; k both k
and g ; 8 both 8 and z (hard g and z being rarely heard,
however) ; and that p when used represents a peculiar
sound to be noted below, something like Eng. pw. In
Sam, * represents a guttural sound between h and k,
and stands often for what is k in the cognate dialects.
In Mg, o represents u; y represents i (y as in
county) ; and j represents d^.
The Vowels a, e, i, o, u, have the Italian sounds.
" In My. and Javanese e and o are nothing but modi-
fications of i and u " (F. Mul.) ; so in the Tagala
dialects. In the Tagala alphabet one character repre-
sents both i and e, and another represents both u and
o. Thus the Oc mother tongue, like the most ancient
Se. dialects, had only the three vowels a, i, tt. As in
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
THE SE.-OC. ALPliABETIC CHARACTERS, ETC. 21
Arabic so in My. and Ef., the vowel a is often pro-
nounced as a short e. Vowel changes are frequent in
Se.-Oc.
The Consonants. — The Se. guttural sounds are found
in some Oc. dialects — see, for instance, as to the most
peculiar of these, the Aiabic " (Glixiin), what is said
in Dr. Codrington's work (The Melaneaian Languages)
about " the Melanesian g." But in our four dialects
these guttural sounds have usually been softened into
a mere breathing (spiritus lenis), according to the
analytic tendency of the Se. Thus Ayin, or *, in
Assyrian, &c., is usually a mere vowel or weak letter
{ayin or ghain is sometimes represented by A or A; in
Oc), and h is either k, h, or lost altogether. In
Amharic *, and * (aleph and ayin) "are both pro-
nounced alike as the Greek spiritus lenis Q," and k
(Arb. and Heb. A), h (Arb. and Heb. h), and kh (Arb.
kh) " are all pronounced alike, like h in horse, and are
often exchanged for aleph (a, or '), thus entirely
dropping the aspiration " (Isenberg, Amharic Oram-
mar ; compare Dillmann, Ethiopic Qrammar),
Ng is usually a corruption of n, as in Amharic,
but sometimes of m, and often of h
It is simply impossible to give, in a brief space, an
account, with examples, of the changes of consonants
that take place in Oc, or in Se.-Oc, occasioned by the
formation of words, euphony, phonetic decay, and
dialectic variation, and the operation of the analytic
tendency, in what Ges. {Heh, Or.) calls "commutation,
assimilation, rejection and addition, transposition,"
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
22 OCEANIA*
whether we compare among themselves the Se. dia-
lects, or the Oc dialects, or the Oc. with the Se.
dialects. Yet the changes, whether of consonants or
vowels, though they are innumerable, are not such as
to destroy the family likeness of the dialects. Every-
one knows a human face when he sees it, but no two
human faces are exactly alike in every particular. I
shall only give here a few notes on this subject,
referring the reader for fuller information to the Se*
and Oc. grammars, among the latter especially to the
general works of F. Muller, while for the Ma.-Ha.
may be consulted Hale's Polynedan Orammar, and
for the Papuan the works of Gabelentz and Codring-
ton above-named. When phonetic changes have been
going on for thousands of years we have to take into
account, not only the present corrupted phonetic form,
and the most ancient and uncorrupted, but also the
numerous intermediate forms that have appeared and
disappeared in the intervening ages, and, in the
absence of ancient literature, without record. This is
the law of gradual " transition." In Oceania we have
no books of different ages (though we have number-
less living dialects, which, by exhibiting the same
words in different stages of phonetic decay, answer
to some extent this same purpose) such as exist in
Europe, connecting the modern Indo-European
analytic dialects with the ancient inflectional tongues
from which they have descended, and help the
student to prove the fact of descent. Supposing there
were no literature in Great Britain, and only the vulgar
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
THE SE.-OC. ALPHABETIC CHARACTERS, ETC. 23
A.ngIo^Saxon dialects of the counties of England and
Scotland, and no other Teutonic dialect, ancient or
modern, in existence, the difficulty of proving these
vulgar English and Scotch dialects Indo-European
would be much greater than it is, and although
phonetic changes take place according to fixed laws it
would be difficult to explain all such changes observed
in these dialects except in the most general terms,
very much as in the Oc. dialects. Why, for instance,
should we have " Scots wha hae wi " instead of " Scots
who have with," and " fi, se oo," instead of " all one
wool," ' o,' and * off,' with * of,' and * i ' f or ' in ' ?
Hale, speaking of Ma.-Ha., says that no dialect
makes any distinction between the sounds of b and p,
d and t, g and k, I and r, or v and w ; and that I is
frequently sounded like d, t like L (See above on the
Ef . letters b, /, t, k.) In Ef . 6 and /, when the initial
consonant of a verb, are universally interchangeable
for euphony, which sometimes is determined by the
caprice of the speaker.
Hale gives the following table of letter changes in
the Ma.-Ha. dialects : —
»kaof.
Sam.
Tong.
Maori.
Barat.
Mang.
Paum.
Tab.
Ha.
Nuk
f
f
f
w;h
—
—
W
f,h
h
f,h
k
»
k
k
k
k
k
»
»
k
1
1
1
r
r
r
r
r
1
r
m
m
m
m
m
px
m
m
m
m
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
ng
^g
ng
^
ng
ng
ng
—
n
ng, k, n
P
P
P,b
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
s
s
h
h
—
h
h
h
h
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
V
V
V
w
V
V
V
V
w
V
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
24 OCEANIA.
He gives Ha. t, but it answers for both t and k, and
the question as to which letter should be used has
been settled in favour of k. Note in Nukahivan the
interchange of n (the original letter) through mg tok.
In £f . k and ng are very frequently interchanged. A
table of this kind is interesting, but applies only to a
limited number of Oc. dialects, and to the compara-
tively recent changes in these. For our purpose we
have to go much deeper, taking into consideration all
the branches of the Oc. and their phonetic changes
from the most ancient times to the present.
My 6, /, and u, in Ef., especially when ending a
word (or a syllable), are sometimes interchanged, the
consonant into the vowel, not vice verad. In the Se.
languages m is readily changed into b or v ; m and v
are interchangeable in Assyrian. In Himyafitic
(Halevy, Etudes Saheenees) the common Se. mn
(who ?) and mn (from) are written bn, or vn, and m
(from) is written b, or v, like b, or v (in). Again 6,
/, or w readily passes into a mere vowel. See the Se.
grammars, e.g., Isenberg (Amh.), who remarks that
what in Amharic is 6, in Tigre is v, which is readily
changed " into a mere vowel o . . . being a mere
condensation of that vowel." So p (/) and b (v) in
Mod. Syr. are often vocalized (Stoddart, Mod, Syr.
Orammar.) In Hebrew one letter represents both 6
and V, and another letter both p and /. In Arabic the
p sound, in My. the / sound, has been lost.
k In Sam. k hardly exists, being represented by
' as aforesaid. This * and the Oc. k generally is often
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
THE SE.-OC. ALPHABETIC CHARACTERS, ETC. 25
elided. In Mg. and My. k and h are sometimes inter-
changed, and in Mg. often elided. What is k in My.
and Ef. is often h in Mg. as (digging), Ef. kili, My.
gali,, Sam. 'eli, Mg. hady. In this example also, what
is I in the other dialects is d in Mg. What is k in Eth.,
&c., is often h in Araharic. Heb., Arb., and Eth. h,
"a strongly -articulated, guttural A;," is pronounced
vulgarly in Syria and Shoa as a mere spiritus lenis ;
so often in Oc, as will be seen below in the words
child, above, below, &c.
I, r. These letters are very frequently interchanged,
and often elided, and r readily changes into d, t, and
t into ts and 8,z;l readily changes into d, t, and t into
s, z (in Heb. r and z are interchanged) on the one hand,
and into n, and n into m or ng on the other ; r in Se.
is partly guttural, and in Oc. is found changed into g
and h (F. Mul.) in some dialects. In Oc. I is often
found changed into fc, sometimes through ng (n),
sometimes through L For examples of changes of I,
see below on the negative adverb, the article, and the
prepositions.
In the ancient languages instead of a doubled
letter was sometimes used a single letter with r, or n
(m) before it. Letters with r (I) or n (m) before
them are common in Oc, as nd, nt, mb, &c.
N, m. In Se.-Oc. n is very frequently elided (" tht<
fleeting nun "), and also m, though not so often, both
from the beginning, middle, and end of words ; and
they are also very frequently irfterchanged. N is found
changed into k, through ng.
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
26 OCEANIA*
t, th. This letter is sometimes elided in Se.-Oc.,
and interchanged from the earliest to the latest
times with k (see the personal pronouns for in-
stances). In Ha. both t and k are represented by
the one letter k. It is changed also into h; into
r, i, often ; and into te, 8, tr, d, nt, md, nr, &c. In
Barbaryand Algeria the Arb. t is pronounced ta, in
Mg. the termination t is pronounced tr in one
<lialect, is in another. This Se.-Oc. ending will be
treated of below as to its uses and phonetic changes.
In one dialect of Mallicolo what is v or f in Oc.
generally is th, thus the common Oc. word fa/ine or
vavine is thathine (woman), and the common fan or
van (to go) is than, and in Rotuma t is changed to /,
as mat (eye) to maf. This interchange of t to f is
also seen in Mg. in the final tr, t (Anc. Se. fern, and
abstract ending), thus, rakotra, rakofana({or rakotan^i),
{k to /) lelaka, lelafina (cf. vintana, kintana, lintana,
star), bohaka, hohafina, donaka, donafina, horaka,
horahiTia (k, t, f, h): and see on the numeral "two"
below, which has the same Anc. Se. terminal, t, th,
changed in some dialects to v, k, h. In this Mallicolo
dialect, and in Rotuma, we see clearly laid before us
this interchange ; in the other dialects we see traces
of its working from early times. This is a lesson to
which we may get a parallel as to almost all the
particular phonetic interchanges in Oc. ; in one dialect
we find a particular interchange very frequent, in
another another, but in* the one as in the other has
only been given special prominence to what has always
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
THE SE.-OC. ALPHABETIC CHARACTERS, ETC. 27
been and is in the Oe. family, though more or less
latent here or there, or then or now. Compare the
vulgar Arb. tomm for fmtvm mouth, and fwm for
th/wm deinde ; c/. also fahlaly thahlal.
s. This letter is changed into h, t, r, I, sometimes
to n, and sometimes elided.
The changes occurring in the formation of words,
and in the formative particles, prefix, infix, and suffix,
and also the changes in, and connected with, the
article, will be treated of below.
F. MuUer has noted the interchange of y and — Mg.
izy, My. iya, he. The peculiar combination seen in
the Eth. ku (kw), &c., occurs in Oc. in some dialects
as Ef. kw, bw (represented by p, see above), mw (cf.
Oodrington).
As in all languages, the consonants uttered by the
same organs most readily interchange, as dentals with
dentals, labials with labials, and palatals with palatals.
In Se.-Oc. sibilants and dentals and the letters I, n, r
readily interchange, also the t and k sounds ; the k
sounds and gutturals are apt to be elided, also the
labials and the semi-vowel sounds w and ^, and even
the sibilants and dentals. The large multitude of Se.
triliterals treated of in grammars as weak verbs, verbs
with gutturals, and contracted verbs, one or more of
whose letters are gutturals, or semi- vowels, as ', h, h, S
2/, Wy or whose first letter is n, or whose second letter
is doubled, usually appear in Oc. in their short or
corrupted forms. In comparing the Oc. shortened
with the Anc. Se, fuller forms of the common tri-
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
28 OCEANIA.
literal words, it is important also to bear in mind the
influence of the accent. The accented part of the
word is retained, the unaccented being more apt to
disappear. The Se. triliterals that " were originally
trisyllabic (as in Arabic), and became by degrees two-
syllable (in Hebrew), and one-syllable (in Aramaic),"
are two-syllable in Oc. In Arb. the accent in these
words was on the first syllable, and in two-syllable
words also on the first syllable. In Oc, as F. M. has
remarked, the great mass of the stem-words are two-
syllable, and the accent is on the first syllable. Of
course I speak of the general rule in each case. Now
Anc. Se. trisyllabic triliterals, none of the three letters
of which were weak letters, and which had the accent
on the first syllable, gradually came to be pronounced
in Oc. in two syllables, the final unaccented (third)
syllable being most naturally dropped by the opera-
tion of the law of " laziness," or " least action," and
the final (third) consonant, which then closed the
second and unaccented syllable of the bisyllabic word,
naturally disappearing also in many cases. Without
entering into particulars, it is evident that the pre-
valence in Oc. of the bisyllabic pronunciation of the
stem-words with the accent on the first syllable has
an important bearing on the present subject, and has
operated in the contraction of many of the ancient
words to their present form.
In the Malay, in many triliteral words (whether
ancient or intermediate triliterals), the third or final
consonant written is elided in pronunciation (see
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
THE SE.-OC. ALPHABETIC CHARACTERS, ETC. 29
Marsden's My. Gr., pp. 114-115), and the shortened
form is sometimes the common one in Ef. and Sam.,
as " skin," " bark," My. (written) kwlit, (pronounced)
kwliky Ef. kuli, d. vnli, Sam. iZi, Ma. kiriy Mg. hoditra,
Heb. geled, Arb. gilid, gild ; " fearing," My. tcihiity Mg.
tahotray Ef. mataku, Sam. mata'u ; " drinking," Mg.
minona, My, minuTn, Ef. minu, Sam. inu ; My. darat,
pronounced darah, shore; saH^, saHA, sick (Ef . misaki,
Sam. ma'i); aiiaA; (Mg. anaka\ child, pronounced
atia, in Ef. only as ani. These few examples indicate
the fact that a number of the stem-words, which
are equally in Mg. and My. triliterals, in Mg. are tri-
syllabic, in My. bisyllabic, while in Ef. and Sam. the
third or final letter, dropped in My. in pronunciation,
has disappeared. But this elided final letter some-
times reappears in Ef. and Sam., when a suffix is
attached to the word — thus, to take the above words, in
'Ei,hdi with suffix i becomes kultiy in Sam. ma^a't6with
suffi:? ia becomes mata'utiay in Ef. minu with suffix
i becomes minungiy in Sam. inu with suffix anga be-
comes inumangay with suffix ia, inuniia ; as in its
disappearance we see the influence of the accent, so in
the reappearance of the final letter we also see the
influence of the accent, for the suffixed particle draws
the accent towards the end of the word. We see the
same phenomenon in the Anc. Se. languages, in, for
instance, the losing in pronunciation of the ending t
or thy when no suffix is attached to it, and its re-
appearance when a suffix is attached to it. It appears
that the final consonant in any closed syllable is apt
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
30 OCEANIA.
to be elided in pronunciation in My. — ^thus, the for-
mative prefix bar, or ber, is commonly pronounced ba,
or be, and so the formative prefix tar, or ter, pro-
nounced ta or te, and, as before, the shortened form
may be the only one in Ef . and Sam., as My. barkalahi,
to fight (from kalahi, fight), Ef. faJcah, fight, war, Fi.
voUu ; My. baranak (cmak, child), Sam. fdnau, to bear
a child (Makassar ma-owia) ; My. bardarah, Ef . mita,
to bleed (Tagala mataga, g for r, Bugis madara),
denominative verb from My. darah (Ja. and Mg. ra,
Ef. ra, tra) blood. When a prefix is attached to a
word it tends to draw away the accent further from
the end of the word, which is the more apt to be
elided in pronunciation. In Se.-Oc. the article is pre-
fixed, and not only itself has undergone various
phonetic changes, but has operated in causing changes
in the words to which it is attached.
The changes in particular words will be noted
below in each case, when necessary, as they occur.
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
CHAPTER III.
Pronominal Words and Particles.
As F. Muller has remarked, there are no roots in
either the Se. or Oe. languages, but only stem-words
or formed words ; and in both the one-syllable stem-
words are contracted words. The tendency of the Se.
languages, in the course of analytic development, is to
replace the living inflection by internal vowel changes,
by the external inflection by formative additions, and
by syntactical processes. But the Se. languages, how-
ever analytic, must bear in the stem-words the marks
(though these may sometimes be effaced by phonetic
corruption) of the characteristic inflection by internal
vowel change. And it is thus that the Oc. languages
bear that inflectional stamp in their stem- words, while
they still use livingly, and with the natural modifica-
tions, the inflection by formative additions, and largely
use the original Se. syntactical processes. The stem-
word, as before said, in Oc. bisyllabic, may, as in Anc.
Se., " be indifferently either a verb or a noun." The stem-
words are either primitive, secondary, or derivative
— by secondary being meant a stem-word originally
derivative, but now, whether tri-literal, quadri-literal.
or quinque-literal, used as a primitive or ground stem.
In Anc. Se. reduplication was used to denote repeti-
Digitized by VjOO^I^
32 OCEANIA.
tion, intensity, &c. ; in Oc, also, reduplication, with
the natural modifications rendered necessary by pho-
netic and grammatical decay and simplification, is
largely used. 'In Se.-Oc. the whole material of the
language may be considered under two heads — the
great mass of stem- words, and, in whole or in part
derived from them and contracted, the smaller class of
ancient and common pronominal words and particles,
formative and syntactical. The words of the latter
class, though fewer, are of the first importance, being
not only a fundamental part of the material, but also
of the organic structure of the Se.-Oc. languages, both
in the formation of derivative words and of sentences.
These, naturally, therefore may be treated of at this
stage, and I begin with the demonstrative particles.
These are — 1, n* or 'n ; 2, 7 or T ; 3, A^ ; and 4, ta,
da, sa, za, which last three are variations of ta. The
third personal pronoun, 6, u, i, he, she, it, is also used
as a demonstrative, and combined with demonstra-
tives ; and, 6, the final particle a has a demonstrative
power pointing to a distance. These all appear on
both sides of the comparison in the following, as 1 in
Mg. iny. My. ini, Ef. in, ni, na, Sam. na, n^i, Syr.
hana, Ch. hen, Assy, annu, Himy. hen, " this."
Again 2 appears in Sam. le, Arb. cd, the article com-
posed of " the prosthetic a " and the demonstrative
syllable V or li, in Ef. ra, li, erik, arai, this, that,
and in the common plural signifying " these," " those,"
" they," Mg. ireo, izareo, My. marika, Ef. n^zra^
inira, Epi nala, iolai, Sam. 'o i latov, {tou for
'• Digitized by VjOOQ IC
PRONOMINAL WORDS AND PARTICLES. 33
tolu, 3), Niue lau (tolu), Tonga nau (tolu), Tagala
sila, Fiji ko ira, Paama ke ila, Tanna ila, Aneityum
aray Heb. elleh, Amh. ela, eleh (h for k), Eth. ellu,
elehiy Ch. illek, Arb. oZaA;a and olaikay heola, heolaik,
Mg. ireto, Eth. elontu, Mg. ireny, Himy. eieti.
Again, 3 appears in My. iki £his, iA;it and ika, that ;
Himy. ka, that; E^i. afe), that; New Caled. yek, he, she,
it; Amh. yh, yth (for yk, yek), this; Ch. se^, Arb. daka,
Santo t^ttgfa, Ef. tuk, anduk, Eth. elekuetw, eleketu,
Mg. irikitra, irokotra, that. Also, 4 appears in Mg.
i^y, itony, this ; My. i^u, that, he, she, it, the ; Bugis
yatUy Eth. uHu y%, he, she, it, the, that ; Tigre et, or
etc ; also in the above Mg. irikitraj Eth. eleketu, Mg.
izato, My. si^u, Ef. sentUy setu, Eth. ^re^i^u for zetu.
It appears also in Arb. da, Ch. deA;, deria. Again, 4
as sibilant appears in some of the above, and in Ef.
8^, Eth. zi, Heb. zeh, hazzeh, Tig. eze, this ; Amh. e^^a,
that (for eziya) ; and in My. aika, here, Eth. zeku,
that, Amh. e2?eA (A for k), this.
The pronoun of the third person, u, i, is rarely used
unless combined with other demonstrative particles.
In the ancient languages u was masculine, i feminine,
but in the Pentateuch, hw denotes he, she, it ; and i
(y*) prefixed to verbs, as in Eth., Mod. Arb., and Assy.,
denotes he, she, it ; and in Ef ., before verbs, i denotes
he, she, it ; in Syr. ii? prefixed to verbs is probably a
combination of n and i : i has become prevalent in
the third personal pronoun in Oc, and is common
mas., fern., neut.) In Ma.-Ha., o (for u) is a demon-
strative and article, with which compare Mod. Syr. o.
4
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
34 OCEANIA.
In the Sa-Oc. the pronoun third person is often used
as an article. Both i and u often have a suffixed,
giving a kind of emphasis, as £f . tta this, ia this, he,
she, it, Sam. ia, My. iya — compare Arb. huwa, hua,
hiya, hia ; with the dem. or article (see below) pre-
fixed, Mg. izy, zy, Tagala aiya, Ef. aia, si, aa, 8, he, she,
it, Sam. sia this. My. diya, dia, Ef. tia and via, Ef. ki
(Tongan Ico, Sam. 'o), My. inia, Ef . inia, and nai, and
suffixed My. nia, Mg. ny, Ef. nia, ni, na, n, Sam. 'o ia
he, she, it, Fi. koya, that, he, she, it, Ef . koya or koia
that, there (close at hand), Ma. ia, that, he, she, it. In
Amh. ya is " that " and sometimes he ; but in Amh. ersu
(Eth. reeao) has replaced the common pronoun third
person, literally " his head," as if " his lordship " were
used in Eng. for " he." As a " personal article," and
an article before pronouns, i, simple or combined {ki,
si) is much used in Oc. — compare Rabbinic ihu, ihi.
For the pronoun third person plural we have —
1. The above plural demonstrative, which see. It
sometimes has the article (for which see below), or is
suffixed to the pron. third sing., as, Ef . inia he, inira
they, nai he, nara they, Mg. izy, izareo. My. inia,
and (m for n) maHka, Sam. 'o ia, 'o i la (tou).
2. Ef. u, with article eru or iru (dialect r elided,
see article below), iu, or ?u, they. This is the Anc. Se.
inflectional plural third pers. pron. contracted, thus
(original Eth. um, Dillmann), Arb. hum, Ef. H, the
final m being elided, as it is, for instance, in Mod. Arb.
entutoventum,ye; Eth. dlu tor ellum, those, ke. : see
further below on the second and first pers, pronouns.
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
•PRONOMINAL WORDS AND PARTICLES. 35
3. The plural demonstrative, in 1, prefixed to the
plural pers. pron. in 2, thus, Niue lau, Tonga nau :
lau, mtu therefore literally signify " those — ^they."
4. The plural pronoun third person in 2, with the
pi. dem. in 1 after it. — The pi. pron. (see 2) sometimes
suffixed a (dem.), as in Heb. hemah, Mod. Arb. homma,
and sometimes u, as in Anc. Arb. humu. Now, in the
Oc. pron. second person, My. kamu (see below) we
find contraction by the elision of the m (final part) in
Tag. Jcayu, My. kau, and of the ka or kw (initial part)
in My. mw, Ef . mu, so Tagala. So, in the third person
plural, also, we have both contractions, the one eliding
the initial, the other the final part. Thus, in Amb.
i is " he," ^ they (for u, Ef. d., with article, ri for rw
they), but, in the expressions " they two," " they
three" (" dual " and " trial "), it occurs in Amb. as mv,
(Arb. humu), mu ri they two, mu si they three, or,
as in the dialect in Gabelentz, bo ro or hv, rw they
two, bu 8U they three. We may, perhaps, compare
Tahiti vera {v\ however, may be the article, as in vau,
I) they, ra (tou), ra as in vera (see 1), being " they
three or more." Also, we may compare Ef. mara or
mera, used in a well-known Oc. phrase, thus, John
mara Peter, " John they Peter " for John and
Peter, as in Ef. nara (1) may also be used, John
nara Peter: John mara nan, usually written John
meroan, literally "John they there," meaning John
and others. In the Ma.-Ha. dialects simple ma
(probably " they ") is thus used, and in Ef. the same
with the demonstrative na changed to nga, thus.
Digitized by V^OOQ IC
36 OCEANIA.
Ma. John ma, £f. John Tnanga, In Tagala the
same manga is used, but is put before the noun, as we
can say in £f. nara John. Thus a kind of (analytic
or syntactical) plural is formed in Oc. by the help of
a word which is an Anc. inflected plural. In Ef . and
Tag. manga is used with both proper and common
nouns. In Tanna it is suffixed and enclitic as mi, as
English boat, boatimi boats (pL), boatimi (dual) two
boats. It is used also with the interrogative pronouns
as Ma. wai who ? singular, wai Toa who ? plural ;
Ef . 8€ who ? singular, se viai and se mani who ?
plural ; Ef . dialect kehe (he for ae) who ? singular,
kehe mxinga who ? plural ; Tanna svmami (for sin^mi)
who ? plural, aimami who ? dual ; Santo, ro ae who ?
plural ; Mota irasei who ? plural, literally they (or
those) who ?
The Oc. pronoun third person dual is (so F. Muller,
&c.) formed by suffixing to the pronoun the numeral
"two," which, as I shall show, has the Anc. Se.
inflectional dual ending a. This numeral is in My.
dv,a, Mg. and Ef. rua, Sam. Ivai, Tonga (initial conso-
nant elided) ua, Anc. Arb. thinta, &c. (see below on
the numerals), in all of which the a has the Se. dual
ending. This numeral is combined with the above
plural demonstrative la ra — thus, Sam. laua, Tonga
(pi. nau) nana, Nine (pi. lau) laua, contracted la ;
Ef . (only in latter form) rd they — two ; Ef . dialect ri
they, via they — two {ri ma, riua, ria). This is the
Oc. analytic or syntactical dual pronoun, in which is
used an Anc. Se. inflected dual word. Generally in
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
PRONOMINAL WORDS AND PARTICLES. 37
the more analytic Se. dialects, as Eth. and Syr., this
dual termination is retained only in the numeral
" two." In the Anc. Arb. there is a dual pronoun of
the third and second persons, huma they two,
antuma you two, in which the- same a is seen^
The Sam, and Ef. analytic dual of the third and
second persons is used instead of this, and thus the
Anc. dual termination is much more frequently used
in Sam. and Ef . than in Eth. and Syr.
The pronoun of the second person is, used for
singular, in Mg. separate hiando, suffixed nao, and ao,
My. separate angkau, suffixed kau, Ef, separate ango
(for anko, ankau), short form kv, (for kau), suffixed
ko, dialect k, My. and Ef., dialect, ang for ank thou,
Sam. separate 'o oe, suffixed v,; also in My. and
Ef . suffixed mu, and ma, Mg. hiamao has hi prefixed,
compare Negrito decarmiy hicamu, aikam (for the pre-
fix, see below on the article), and anao, for ankaOy is
identical with My. angkan for ankau, and Ef. ango
(anko). Sam. oe, which elides the k, like Mg. a^, com-
pares with Ef. ko, ku, My. kau, Tag. kayu. The k is
retained in Mg. indriako (indH lo !), and provincial
roky, rikia (rika). In My. also, occurs the form
dikau (and dika), di of diya he (see article below).
The forms kau, angkau, are plural used for singular,
as Eng. " you " for " thou." Used for plural, we have
Mg. separate hianareo, suffixed nareo and areo, My.
separate, and suffixed kamu, and suffixed mu, Ef.
separate akam, akamu, and with enclitic 8 (which is
also attached to pronouns in Eth.) akamua, dialect
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
38 OCEANIA.
humUt short form kvu, suflixed mu, Sam. separate
'o outou, suflixed on tou (ton three), Mg. anareo (com-
pare Amh, anta thou, elant* ye, literally "those — -
thou ") is for aiikareo thou — those, thou (and) those ;
so also Bopp. Ef, akam, akamu is probably (cf. ango
for anko) for ankam, My. kamu is the same without
the article a or an, Sam. ou (tou) is for kou, My.
A;au. My. and Ef. mu is by elision of the ka (initial
part) for A:amu, and My. kati, Ef. ku, is for the same
by elision, as above remarked, of the m (final part) :
80 Florida gamu and gau, and thus we have in Bara-
tonga ko (tou), and in Niue mu (tolu). The Se. pro-
noun second person was in Heb. singular anta or
anka (t changed to k), or atta, akka, the n of the pre-
fixed demonstrative or article an being assimilated,
and plural anfem or attem, ankem or akkem. What
is tern, kem in Heb. is tuTu, tumu, kum, kumu in Arb.,
and temu, kemn in Eth. Heb. t&m is sometimes con-
tracted to tu, and Arb. tumu in Mod. Arb. to tu^ Eth.
antemu in Amh. to antu, and kemu to hu Qt for i),
and ka to A.
Eawi (Java) anta compares with Heb. Arb. Eth.
anta thou ; Tagala suffixed ka with Eth. suffixed ka
thou, and-Ef. d. suffixed k thee with Syr. suffixed k
thee, Mg. ana (i.e., anka) in ana-reo with Heb.
anka thou, and Ef . akarti, akamu (ku, ko, kumu, mu,
ina, My. angkau, kau, kamu, mu, Sam. 'oe, 'ott, Mg.
g^nao, i.e., ankao, nao, ao\ with Heb. akkem (Arb.
kvmxUy Eth. kemu, Amh, Ait, &c.) The common use
in Oc. of the plural for the singular is similar to that
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
PRONOMINAL WORDS AND PARTICLES. 39
in English, and in Amh. antw (Eth. antemu plural) is
used for the singular. In Ef. the more contracted
form ango is used for the singular, and the uncon^
tracted or fuller form aJcam for the plural. I adopt
the explanation of this given by Bopp (p. 89, speaking
of the Tagala) in the sentence beginning, *' Ich halte
aber diese Unterscheidung fur zuf allig." The presence
in this pronoun of the prefixed demonstrative an in
Mg., My., and Ef., as in Arb., Heb., Syr., Eth., is note-
worthy. The Oc. syntactical dual is formed by the ua
or Tua, above explained in connection with the third
personal pronoun, in Sam. ovZua, Marquesas koua^
Nine mua, Ef. ko rua, ho ra, okaTn ra : Ef. d. kia,
in which dialect ki is for ku you, as ri for ruu they,
so that kia seems to compare with Arb. kuma you
— two (as ki with kum you) rather than with ko
rua.
The pronoun first person singular is in Mg. separate
izaJio, ako, suffixed ko, hy, My. separate aku, suffixed
ku, Ef . separate kinau (short form a), suffixed gn (ku,
k), au, Sam. separate 'o a'u, suffixed 'u, a'u. For iz
in izaho, ki in kiriau, 'o in 'o a'u, see the article
below. Ef. 'tuxu is for 'nahw, Sam. a'u, for aku, Mg.
oho for aku, and 'nakn {an or enaku) compares with
Assy, andkn, anku (Heb. anoki), an being the same
prefixed dem. as is attached to the pron. second person.
Heb. anoki becomes contracted to ani, with which
compares Arb. and Eth. ana, &c., Ef. dialects enu, ni,
Amb. na, ni, &c. My. aku (Mg. aho, Sam. a'u, Ef. au)
is without this an, and the original Se. pronoun. Mg.
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
40 OCEANU.
ho, My. kuy Ef. gru, kn, Sam. 'u, compares with Assy.
and Eth. hw, Amh. hu suffixed, and Ef. a (short form)
before verbs, with Heb., Arb., &c., a prefixed to verbs.
The plural first personal pronoun is in Mg. separate
izahay, suffixed nay, ay, My. separate and suffixed
hami, Ef. separate hinami (dialects kimam, komam,
ningami, angamUy nikam, Eromanga kam, Aniwa
akimi, Florida garni, and contracted gai, short form ai,
Motu ai), short form an, suffixed nami (dialects ngaTwi,
kam), Espiritu Santo {nau, I) anam, suffixed nam,
Sam. separate 'o i ma (tou), suffixed ma (tou). Mg.
ahay compares with Tagala and My. kami by the
elision of the m, as Florida gai for gami, Ef. kimam
for kinami shows the change of n for m. Ef. kinami
has the same article ki as khiau I, and is certainly
the plural of kiTiau, Ef, 'nami, of which ngami,
ngam, kam are variations, is identical with Mg. nay,
as Ef. ngami, kam, My. kami with Mg. ahay. Siam.
ma has elided the first syllable of this pronoun, like
My. (and Ef. and Nine) mu for kamu ye. Ef. nami
(Mg. nay, Santo anam) compares with Arb. nahnu
(Mod. Arb. nahna, nahn, Heb. anahna, Eth. nehna),
and it may be a question whether the final n of
nahnu is for the original m (of the Se. plural) which
is retained in the Oc. nam^i, kami, or whether this
Oc. m is by a more recent change from this Arb., &c.,
n: the m of the Se. plural termination in Heb. is
more original than the n in Arb. in nouns, and this m
appears in both the Arb., Eth., and Heb. pronouns of
the second and third persons, but has been changed even
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
PRONOMINAL WORDS AND PARTICLES. 41
in these to ti in Aramaic. Thus nami is identical
with TUihnu, the h of which (weakened from the k of
the first person singular, which originally was anaJcu,
&s in Assy., of which nahnu is the plural) is naturally
elided in Oc, especially as closing a syllable and
immediately before a nasal. In Oc. in ndbmi the accent
is accordingly on the a. In one Ef . dialect the short
form (before verbs) is m'ih and jm, Paama me (cf. Sam.
ma\ Epi ni (Epi dialect me), where we see the same
interchange of n and m. Epi. ni compares with the
prefixed (to verbs) Anc. form, Heb., Assy, m, Eth.
ne, Arb. na. The form with k, the article, retains the
n (dem.) in Ef. kinau, kinami, Santo kariamy changes
it to m in Ef. kimam, Mallicolo kamam. In Ef. nin-
garni, nikam, ngami, kam the k is for n {ng), and kam
for nfiam, and with Ef. kam is identical, Amb. kima,
Eromanga kam, kimi, My. and Tag. kami, Aniwa
akimi, Florida igami, and gai, short form ai, Mg.
oJiay (for akay). Accordingly the Mg. in the suffixed
form of this pronoun has the original n in nay, Ef.
nami, the n of nay is elided when it is suffixed to
a noun ending in k, as zanak child, zanakay our
child, but reny mother, reninay our mother. Thus
Ef. kiTiami is an older or more incorrupt form of this
Oc. pronoun than the My. and Mg. kdmi, ahay.
Without either the k, or the n are Motu ai, Florida
short form ai, Ef. short form aw, Mg. suffixed as above
ay, i.e., ai. Now as Mg. ai is, as above proved, for
ami, so Ef. avb is for amw (in one Ef. dialect, it is
actually mvb, see above), and compares with Heb. anu
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
42 OCEANTA.
(contraction of anahnu), as ami with the same;
compare also, Mod. Syr. ahni, Mod. Arb. ahnxi, with
Heb. anu in which the h is elided.
The Oc. syntactical dual is in Sam. HfiatLa contracted
Olid, " we — two," Ef . dialect Tnoa (for mu ua), other
Ef . dialect ara, or au tnta we — ^two ; for ua, ma, a,
see above.
Inclusive. — The Oc " inclusive pronoun " is a syn-
tactical combination of the pronouns of the first and
second persons, and denotes " I and thou " or '' I and
you," and is in Mg. isika {is as iz in izaho), My.
Hta, Ef . ningita, nikit akit (k and ak for ng, ang, i.e.,
n, an, as in ningami, nam, kara, angam, anam),
short form (in dual) ta, plural tu, Sam. 'o i ta (tou).
In Ef. it is sometimes pronounced kiTigita {ningita),
that is kinu I, and ta (or ka) thou, Santo* int%
Aneityum short form inta, Mg. ika (Epi ita for into)
is for hika, nika, or inka. My. kita for nita or inta
I — thou. In Mod. Arb. the equivalent expression is
ana u ente (or anta) I and thou, Aneit. inta, Santo
inti, the conjunction not being used. The common
short form (with verbs) of the pronoun " thou " in Se.
is ta or ka, and as to the Arb. ana I, sometimes an,
Heb. ani, Amh. and Tig. ene, in one Ef . dialect " I " is
ni, Amb. 7ia, ni, Lif u ini, ene, Lakon ina. The Ef,
(short form) plural tu (I) ye, compares with Tonga tou,
Tagala tayu {ku, kau, kayu, second person plural, see
above), and the Mod. Arb. entu, Amh. antu, Heb. tu
(the final m being elided, see above). This syntac-
tical expression was frequent in Anc. Se., and contrary
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
PRONOMINAL WOBDS AND PARTICLES. 43
to the English usage (you and I) the ego was put
first (I and you) as in Mod. Arb. (Caussin de Percival,
Chr, Arb. Vulgaire, section 223), Gren. xxiii. 15 ; Judges-
xi. 12 ; John ii. 4. The syntactical dual is Tongan
taw (plural), taiua (dual) likei nau, nana, Ef. tv,
(plural), td (for tua, dual), Ef . dialect ti (plural), td (for
tia, dual) : the Ef . " short forms " tu, ta, literally " you,"
"you — two," the "I" being understood from the
longer form. Sam. taua, contracted td, like laiba con-
tracted la.
Thus we learn from the Oc, which are simply and
exclusively the common Se. pronouns, that the Oc.
mother tongue possessed the common Se. inflections of
the plural and dual. The Se. inflection of gender seen
in the second and third personal pronouns singular and
plural which has disappeared from the plural in Mod.
Syr. has disappeared from both singular and plural in
Oc. We shall see below, however, that the Oc. mother
tongue did possess the Se. inflection of gender.
The Ef . " short forms " of the pronouns given above
are used in the nominative before verbs, denoting the
person and number, and occupy the place analytically
of the " personal preformatives " of the Anc. Se. No
verb can be used in Ef. without them, and they can-
not be used without a verb ; the two, pronoun and
verb, form one syntactical expression. These abbre-
viated Ef. pronouns are: for I, a, as in the Anc.
languages ; .for he, she, it, ^, as in the Anc. languages ;
for we, mu and aw and u (Epi ni, Paama me, cf.
Sam. ma), as in the Anc. languages, Heb. ni (for
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
44 OCEANIA.
anu); for thou, Mallicolo ke, Epi. dialect ka, as in the
Anc languages ta, te, tL Te and they in the Anc
-languages were so expressed, the plural termination
being sujffixed to the verb, that when that inflection
(of the " imperfect '*) became broken up, it was neces-
sary to use the short pronoun in Oc. in the plural, as
in Ef. hw you, ?u, fe'u they. This analytic equivalent,
. with the same pronominal elements, for the Anc im-
perfect, prevails in Ef. and other Papuan dialects, but
not in Mg. and My. On the other hand, we have in
Mg. a similar analytic equivalent for the Anc. " per-
fect," which had the pronouns suffixed denoting the
person and number. Thus is suffixed for I, Mg. ko.
My, ktb, Eth. and Assy, ku ; for thou, Tagala Jfca, Eth.
ka, Mg. nao, ao, My. kau ; for we, Mg. Tiay, ay, My.
kaTivif Heb. nu, Arb. na ; for you, My. kamu, Eth,
keTifiu : these, remembering that in nay and kami the
initial consonant is the Anc. prefixed demonstrative n
elided in the Anc. suffixed pronoun, are all identical,
the Mod. with the Anc. In replacing the inflectional
"perfect" by this analytic equivalent it was neces-
saiy in Oc, for obvious reasons, to use the ordinary
pronouns of the third person suffixed, Mg. ny (My.
nia, from mm), n the article, and y (i), he, she, it ;
Mg. zareo (jareo), My. marika, they {izareo they).
From these pronominal fragments and their uses we
learn that the Oc. mother tongue possessed the Se.
inflection of the "perfect and imperfect." In Se.-
Oc. these suffixed pronouns were originally genitives
suffixed to verbal nouns. In Oc. they are suffixed,
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
PRONOMINAL WORDS AND PARTICLES. 45
and as genitives to substantives also, and compare with
the Anc. suffixed pronouns used in the same way, the
" nominal suffix," thus —
my
thy
his
our
your their
Mg.
ko
nao, ao
ny
nay, ay
nareo jareo, ny
My.
ku
kau, mu
nia
kami
kamu -^'^-
Ef.
gvi, ku
ma
na
nami
mu ra
Sam.
*u
u
na
ma (tou)
'ou (tou) la (tou)
Eth.
ya
ka
hu
na
kemu homu
Arb.
i
ka
hu
na
kum (u) hum (u)
The apparent differences in these, between the Oc.
and the Ancient, are caused by — 1, the demonstrative
prefixed to the Oc. in, under "thy," nao; under "his,"
ny; under "our," nay, nami, and kami; and, 2,
phonetic change, as in Sam. ma, Arb. na : a difference
is caused under "your" in nareo, and under "their" in
jareo, ra, la, by using in the mod. dialects the Se. plural
demonstrative instead of the plural personal pronoun.
A difference is also seen under " thy," caused by the
use of the Anc. plural for the Mod. singular, while,
in ny and nia, under " their " we see the singular used
for the plural, as to which, however, it is to be noted
that in Anc Arb. hi (sing.), like Oc. i, in speaking of
things, often denotes the plural, as it does in Ef.
These suffixes in the ancient languages, when attached
to verbs, expressed the accusative, except i, which then
appears (with the dem. n) b& ni: so in Ef. except
ku, gUf which is then au (for aka), and ma, which is
usually ko, but in one dialect k, in another ma, and na.
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
46 OCEANIA.
for which is sometimes na, sometimes a, t, ia, e, ea, and
as in na, with article (see below), ni, ma, 9a, si, ma, ti,
tia, ri, ria, ngi, ngia, mia. In Se.-Oc. the pronouns are
also suffixed to particles, that is, to a preposition, to a
relative, or to both combined, expressing the emphatic
genitive, the dative, or the accusative. In Sam. the
genitive of the pronoun is always expressed in this
latter way, never by attaching the above suffixes
directly to the noun, as in Mg., My., and Ef. ; on the
other hand, the method prevalent in Sam. is rare
in My.
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
CHAPTER IV.
Prepositions and the Article.
Prefixed particles of the genitive, article, relative
pronoun, prepositions — 1, a as Ef. dgu^ Sam. a a'u,
My., frequently used in Sam.
It is the article (see below) used as a relative : in
the Anc. languages the relative was used as a sign
or preposition of the genitive, the, that, or what (of)
me, my, &c. The Sam. o, which is similarly used (o
a*w, o'w) is probably the Sam. demonstrative article o
used as a relative, originally the third personal pro-
noun masculine with the article Mod. Syr. o,
2. To the foregoing the common modern article (see
below on the unconscious, modern, and double article)
is prefixed in Sam., thus, Sam. Wu, Ma. taku, my,
for le a'Uy te a^Uy the of me. Another form of the
article («, see article below) is seen in Sam. aa'u my,
8au thy, Sana his : so Sam. and Ma. with o, Zo*a, ioku
my.
3. The relative is prefixed to the preposition, as in
the Anc. languages, thus in Ef. the above a is pre-
fixed to the preposition ni of (same as Arb. Zi, Heb. l\
&c.), anena his (which of, or to him), dialect ariffinai, a
which, ngi to, nai him. In Eromanga aorung my, «or'
(fi article as in Sam. and r' preposition) the, or which
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
48 OCEANIA.
to. See on the article and prepositions below. So
El. kakana, ka the, kana to him, the, or what his :
Tanna savani, sa the, va in or on, ni him, his. £f.
kakana in another dialect is kanana; in another
kinina, ki the, ni of, and na him : also angana (a, nga,
no) and anangana (ana, nga, na) the, to, or of him.
4. The preposition prefixed in Ma. to both the
above a and o, and to the common or modern form of
the article in Ef . and Tag., thus, Ma. nana and nona
his, £f . ningd his, ningnu my, ning of the. Tag. nang of
the {ang article, as Bopp has remarked), the initial n*
or ni in all these being the prep. " of."
5. The preposition, alone or with article prefixed,
is used as in Eromanga ariyau (dialects eniau, etiyo)
my, arika thy, Arb. liya my, lika thy, Eromanga boyau
(d. piyo) to or on me, buka to or on thee, Arb. ftiya,
bika; Mg. azy his {a\ "to," "of," see below), and with
article ny azy, the of him, or to him ; in Ef. kana his>
literally " to him " (prep, ki or ka), so Tanna kun his
(prep, y to), and fun his (prep. /' in). Compare with
the latter My. punia (Bugis puna), Ef . bienia, and My.
padania {da article, see below), Ma. mana, Fiji vei koya
(see article and prepositions).
The prepositions. — 1. Of the two commonest of the
Se. prepositions, the one is in Heb. bi, Arb. bi, fi,
Eth. ba, Syr. b\ Mod. Syr. bid. Tig. abl, Mg. amy, My.
pada, Ef. ma, mi, bi, fi, bai or bei, Fiji vei, Sam. and
Ma. ma. Mj.pada has da, the usual My. form of the
article (see article below), as has Arb. bit. Mod. Syr.
has in bid the relative d. My. bagi (baki) has the
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
PREPOSITIONS AND THE ARTICLE. 49
preposition ki, and signifies "to, unto, by, for, on
account of."
The meanings and uses of this preposition are many
and various. Gesenius gives its meanings as " in, at,
by, near, on, to, unto, upon, according to, for, on
account of, with, by (instrument and agent), by
(swearing)," &c., and states that after a verb it gives
sometimes a transitive or causative signification to
the verb. This is an important function of the Se.
prepositions. In Mg. it signifies "in, with, by, to,'
&c. ; in My. " on, at, in, to, for, towards, by, according
to, with;" in Ef. it signifies "on account of, on," fee,
and is used very commonly as a kind of verb sub-
stantive (so in the New Hebrides generally), as in
Mod. Arb., and Eth., and in Sam. it signifies " to, for,
with, from, on account of, because of;" in Ha. " at, by,
in, through, unto, by means of," &c. In the sense of
for, on account of, ma, or m\ is used in Sam. before
nouns and pronouns, so Ef . ma or mi with another
preposition (for which below) mxmgi (m/Hd), dialect
mini, My. hagi. In My., Ma., and Fiji, when followed
by the pronoun it denotes the verb " to have," as in
Arb., as My. adapadaku, Fiji tu vei au, Ma. ai m^ku
" I have," literally " is in me," or " on me " (ada, tu,
ai " is " or " are "). In Eth. ba with the suffix pro-
nouns denotes in like manner " I have," " thou hast,"
&c. The genitive or possessive is often expressed in
My. by the word punia (Bugis puna) placed after the
noun or pronoun, as aku punia, mine. With this I
compare Ef. bienia have, or possess it, as a bienia, ku
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
50 OCEANIA..
bienia, i bienia, I have it, thou hast it, he has it. It
can take a noun in the accusative, as Ef. i befatit, he
has a stone, and it is identical with the preposition
under notice^ which came also in Eth. to be used as a
verb signifying " to have ** and governing the accusa-
tive, on which Dillmann remarks : — " So kann auch
diese Verbindung nur daraus eklart wer den, dass
allmahlig der abgeleitete Sinn iiber die ursprungliche
Bedeutung uberwiegte." Thus we see Eth. bo (few)
denoting " in it," " in him," then " is " (as Arb. A Ef.
6i, fi, dialects bai^ mi), then " has," transitive verb.
Now, My. pa, Bu. pu, in punia, puna, Ef. M or jS in
bienia, is identical with this Eth. bo (bu), and punia
simply means " having " or " possessing it," as aku
punia, I possess it, " my," kamu punia, you possess it,
" your," raja punia wang, the king's money, literally
" the king possesses it the money," or " possessing " or
" possessor of it the money."
This preposition is the first letter of the Hebrew
Scriptures, and of the Syr. and Arb. (fil) versions
denoting " in," in the expression " in the beginning,."
and it is used in the same place in the Mg. and My.
versions : so in John i. 1 ; and so John i. 5, ** in (the
darkness)," This is the radical meaning of the prepo-
sition. In the sense of " with," " by," " baptize uith
water," it occurs John i. 33, in Syr., Tig., Arb., and
Mg.
2. The second of the two commonest Se. prepo-
sitions is in Arb, ila. It, Heb. <XK, eli, el, U, Syr. fe, Eth.
La, Tig. na, ne (in which the original I is changed to n).
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
PREPOSITIONS AND THE ARTICLE. 51
Mg. any, arC, a\ ny; Tag., Battak wa, ni ; Ef . m, ngi^ hi,
in; Ma.-Ha. na, no (ni-a, ni^), My. di (l to d), Makassar
and Bugis ri, dialect of Battak t, Ma.-Ha. i, e, Ma. f,
Mg. a, in which the consonant (Z) is elided, Aneityum
ira, Eromanga ira and ra {I to r), My. ri, in rfari {da,
the article the, that or which, of or from) of, from.
Mg. any, My. akan, Ef . in, as Heb. ali, eli. Ef . am has
a the article thus : Ef. ni ae of whom ? am «« that, or
the of whom ? m* natamole of man, am* naiamole the
of man. As in the article (see below) the I of this
preposition is found sometimes in Oc. changed to w,
ng, and k, as Ef . m, w^i, ^2, My. akan, kan, ka (the pre-
position with the demonstrative n suffixed, as in
Himyaritic Ian, la, "sans changer de signification"),
Tag. ka, Mg. ha, ho, Sam % 'ia, i. Ma. ki, i.
It signifies in Heb. " to, on account of, on behalf of,
for (anyone), in, at," and is mark of dative, accusative,
and genitive. In Mg. its meanings are " to, belonging
to, for;" in My. "by, at, in, of, from ;" in Ef. "of, for
(any one), belonging to," and is mark of accusative; in
Ma. " by, (made) by, belonging to, on account of," &c. ;
in Aneityum (Gabelentz) " in, vor, von, aus, auf, mit,
iiber," and sign of the accusative and dative. In
Arb., Heb., Eth., &c., and in Mg., Ef., and Tahiti, and
less prominently in My., it is used as the sign of
the genitive "belonging to," the original meaning
being "to." In Ef., as in Heb., it is used to
denote " for (anyone)," as i ning natamole mate
he for man died. In Tahiti and Ma. it is used to
denote " for, on account of," as in Arb., Heb., Eth.,
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
52 OCEANIA.
and Tig., thus Arb. lima, Heb. lamah, £th. lament, Tig.
nemintay, Tab. no te aha, Amb. ne ha "for," or
« on account of what ? " " why ? " In Tah. and Ma. it
also denotes *' by," " (made) by/* after passive verbs :
so in Heb. " dative of the cause and author," " the
efficient cause after a passive verb most frequently
takes W Compare ni instrumental in some l^apuan
dialects in Codrington's work.
For the change of the original I of this Se. prep, to
n, ng, k, &c., in Oc, see below on the similar changes
of the I of the Se. article I in Oc. Thus we have Mg.
ho (and ha), My. ka, akan, kan, Ef. and Fiji ki, Ma.
and Tongan ki, Sam., Tah., and Ha. and Ma. t. As My.
akan, kan, so Epi has ka and kan, Ef. kin, Mg. often
combines these two prepositions thus, ho amy ; so My •
kapada, Fiji kivei.
The different phonetic forms of this preposition, as
of other particles in Oc, have often been partly occa-
sioned by its position in relation to another word. Its
meanings and uses in the form ki, &c., are generally
the same as those already noticed, thus Mg. " to for,
belonging to," My, " to for, by, of, concerning, relating
to, with." &c., Ef. " to, belonging to," &c., Sam. "in, at,
with, to, for, of, on, on account of, concerning." In
My., Ef., and Sam., it is much used, as in the Anc.
languages, aa a transitive preposition. In Ef and Ma.
ki (Tah. i, ia, a, article) is also instrumental " by," and
also denotes " in, to, at, with," &c. As a transitive
preposition it has the forms in Mg. an* and a\ in
Ma. ki and i, in Ef ki, in Sam. % in My. kan ; these
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
PREPOSITIONS AND THE ARTICLE. 53
BXQ prefixed to the noun or pronoun in Mg., as in the
Anc. languages, between the verb and noun or
pronoun in Ef., and sometimes suffixed to the verb,
sometimes prefixed to the noun or pronoun, and
suffixed to the verb in My. and Sam. In Mg. and Ef.,
as in the Anc. languages, this preposition is also the
sign of the genitive — Mg. an, a\ ny, Ef. wi, ngi, ki, and
so generally in Oc. In Se.-Oc., generally, this pre-
position is a sign of genitive, dative, accusative, and
ablative.
The i in Fiji vet, Ef. (d.) hai or hei, and the o of Mg.
ho, are the article, or the i and o (u) third personal
pronoun singular.
3. A third common Se. preposition is in Heb. 'fm, Syr.
'am, Arb. ma', Mg. amana, My. (with article) dangan
(final n as in kan), Ef . ma, me, Sam. ma with, together
with.
Prepositions are sometimes, whether of the Anc. or
intermediate period, found suffixed to verbs in an Oc.
dialect, owing to having been constantly used after
these verbs as " transitive prepositions," as hi in Ef. libi
— dialects lekbai, limi, U (or lek) — to see, look (Heb.
raah, Arb. rai, Fiji rai), and hi or ba, commonly used
after it as in Heb. raah he "to look upon!* In My.
kan, Ef . ki, Sam. % is often suffixed to the verb, and
much used as the transitive preposition, as in the
Anc. languages. Also, in the Anc. as well as in the Mod.
languages, the article was sometimes between the
preposition and the noun, and sometimes prefixed to
the preposition, as "the or that of," "in," "with."
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
54 OCEANIA.
The article had sometimes the force of the relative
pronoun.
The Article. — The original Se. articles is best pre-
served among the Anc. languages in Arb. as al, el,
"composed of the demonstrative Z," or li, and "the
prosthetic a, which is prefixed only to lighten the
pronunciation." It is pronounced al and el and r
by the modem Arabs; "in South Arabia am was
(and even still is) used for al" In Arb. the I of the
article is assimilated (as essemau for elsemsw) when
the word to which it is prefixed begins with a dental,
sibilant, or liquid ; in Heb. the I is dropped altogether,
and the article appears as ha, Phoenician a or e.
Accordingly this same article appears in different
forms in the Oc. languages ; its common form is in
Mg. ny, Ef. ni, in, na, an, n\ Sam. le, which latter
appears in Tongan as he, Ma. te, Ha. ke, Mai re. In
Ef. the n of the article is rarely changed to ng ; in
Tagala its common form is ang, as it occurs also in
Mg. as an. In Ef. dialects it occurs also as la, V, and
r' ; for instance, nan-guau nose, in one dialect in la*u8u,
and rang time (r* article and ang for an, Arb. an
time), in one dialect is lang, and in another nang,
and in another rak (ng to k). In Ef. it also appears
as a (Fiji a, Ma. a) and e. In both the Anc. and
Mod. languages the article is prefixed (whether to
nouns, pronouns, or prepositions), and has a consider-
able effect upon the pronunciation of the word. In
the Anc. languages, assimilated as above, its loss was
compensated by the doubling or strong pronunciation
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
PREPOSITIONS AND THE ARTICLE. 55
of the letter following it, as Arb. as^emsu for alaeniaw
the sun. Many words, which' were constantly used
with the article in ancient times, appear in Oc. with
the article glued on to them and with the initial
consonant of the word to which it is attached modi-
fied in a way that is thus explained : thus the word
"sun," or "day," is in Mg. andro, My. dri, Ef.
dlo (d. elo)j and the initial syllable is the Se. article
prefixed in the usual way to a Se. word (for which,
see below, signifying " sun," " day " ) whose initial con-
sonant, the article, while being itself modified, has
helped to modify ; while further, by prefixing a syllable
to the word, it helped to facilitate the elision of the
final consonant of the word. The same is true of the
word " chief," Mg. andHa, Ma.-Ha. a/inki, aliki, alii,
(Ef. riki senior), and many others. Of course the
article thus prefixed in ancient times has been
variously changed ; for instance, when the word to
which it was prefixed began with a vowel, or weak
letter (like the Ef. lang, rangy nang time), the con-
sonant of the article is retained, as Mg. ray. My. rama,
Ef. tama, Sam. tamd father (Anc. Se. abu, aha), Mg.
reny, Sam. tind, Tig. €7io, Arb. imu, My. ibu mother,
Mg. rano, Ef, d. *ran, My. danau, Java ranu, Fiji
dranu, Sam. lanuu water, spring water, Arb. 'aynu or
'a'rnu (cf. Heb., &c.) A word may occur in Oc. both
with and without the article, as My. a6u, labu, dabv,
dust, and Ef. tama, ava, and abu father. In words
which have thus, the article prefixed in Anc. times
that article is no longer recognized as an article, but it
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
56 OCEANIA.
is considered as a part of the word (or a *' radical "
letter), and the (in i-eality) compound word is treated
as if it were simple or not compounded, thus the
above Arb. ^a'nvb "water" also means "eye," and
Sam. lanv, lake water, when the adjective termination
a is attached to it, that is, lanua^ means " sore eyes,"
literally " eyey," and lanv, is even used as a denomina-
tive verb " to pour fresh (lake or spring) water on one
after bathing " in the sea, Ef. bangaranu (for a and
banga, see Formative Particles below), the Arb. verb
'ana (from which *a'nu comes) signifying to " flow : "
and to a word with such an anciently prefixed or
radicalized article, the modern article (the two may
be called the double article) is now prefixed as to any
other word; thus the above Ef. 'ran " water" takes the
common Ef. article (Mod. form) n\ as niran, Mg. ny
ratio; and Sam. laau, which is identical with Ef.
maJcaw, Ef. d. nakasu^ Mg. ny hazo (kaii, My. kayu,
" tree," " wood ; " for the Anc. Se. form of this word,
see below) takes the article le laau. This may be called
the unconscious article in Oc., and it is only in this
way that the common Se.-Oc. article is preserved or
used in the My. dialect. Its being so unconscious
points to distant ages in the past when it was the
consciously used article. If these unconscious articles
have been regarded by the natives as parts of the
original words, it is no wonder that they have been
so regarded also by Europeans ; thus Bopp (p. 4) tried
to trace the Sam. laau to Sanscrit braka^a, Prakrit
ritJeka. In Ef. and other New Hebrides dialects, and
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
PREPOSITIONS AND THE ARTICLE. 57
others, a vast number of words have even the Mod.
and common form of the article *n or n prefixed, and
Europeans do not at first perceive it to be the article
in a given dialect till some knowledge has been gained
of that and the kindred dialects ; for instance, the Oc.
word for " child," My. anak, pronounced ana, appears
in Ef. only as ndni — that is, with the article n' (for
this Se. word, see below).
The article is found prefixed to the personal pronoun
of the third person in Se.-Oc., and the compound thus
formed is used both for the personal pronoun and as a
demonstrative, " that," " this," and in certain circum-
stances as an article. The Se. article T is found in
Oc. (the original I changed directly or indirectly, that
is by " transitional" or intermediate changes, as i to ti,
QTi, ng, k, h, or I to t, d, 8, z, k, or I to r, z, 8, &c.) in
the following forms, in addition to the above given,
namely z (or a) and k h, and t (dj, m, fee, as Mg.
anaka, My. anak, with article Mg. zaTiaJca, My. kanaJc,
Ef. kanao, kano, kan (as well as nani) child, Sam.
tama (m for n) sometimes pronounced kama (as in
Haw.), My. cZalapan, delapan, salapan (lapan, Atshin)
'* eight;" compare My. labu, dabtv, ahu, dust, Java
Zmtang, Mg. Ajmtana, My. frmtang, Celebes 6ituy,
Sam. feixx, Ef. masei (Ceram toi) star, Ef. nalangi,
Sam. matangi, the wind. The article, as Aja in My.,
usually appears in Mg. as Aa, as My. kanan, Mg.
Jiavanana the right hand, but Mg. also sometimes has
the k, as Mg. kamory, Ef. namoru, and moru, pool,
Mg. kijanajanaka a doll {zanaka)y kifafa a brush
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
58 OCEANIA.
(/a/a to sweep), hilalao, and lalao play things, hifehy
a cord {fehy tie). Compare also Mg. tavolo, Ef. nabeta
or nabera arrowroot, Mg. temitia, Ef. namit mat,.
Mg. oxLmbo, Ef. na6u, Fiji namftui tail, Mg. laoka, EL
naika, Sam. le ia, Meli (Ma.-Ha., off Efate) taika fish,.
Mg. lamho, Fi. tia intaia swine. The Meli ta has
come by way of the Central Pacific to the New
Hebrides, the Ef. na (naika, taika fish) by way of New
Guinea, and both by way of Malaysia by countless-
steps in thousands of years, from the same origioal
home, and the same original Se. article T of Arabia
and neighbourhood. Compare also, as a specimen
of a large class of words (of which more below), Mg.
Aafatisana, My. X;amatian, Ef. Tiamatiana, or mmatien,.
" the dying," death ; on the large part the article plays,
in combination with the Verb Form Particles, as in
Mg. mahay mana, &c., My. mang, &c., Ef . baJca^ Sam.
fa'a, &c., see below.
The article with the third personal pronoun is as in
the Anc. languages, and has been prefixed in the Anc.
period and become the unconscious article; to this
the Mod. form of the article is also prefixed sometimes
(the double article). The kernel of the Se. pronoun
third pei-son is u or i, to which a (the demonstrative
particle) is often suffixed. My. iya (or iia) occurs also
as inya (the n being supposed by Marsden euphonic),,
and diya, which both Marsden and Craufurd declare
to be a mere euphonic variation of iya ; this latter F.
Miiller identifies with Mg. izy by the interchange of
y and z. While the n of My. inya appears in Ef. ima
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
PREPOSITIONS AND THE ARTICLE. 59
and nai, and while Sam. ia is identical with My. iya,
in all alike in this pronoun as sufGxed the n appears
thus — Mg. ny (after a preposition zy), My. nia ornyUy
Ef. na, ni, and nia. The Mg. izy is identical with
My. iya, thus : it is without the suffixed a, and iy.
My., is the same as izy, Mg., by the elision, as in Sam.
ia, of the I of the article, originally el or il, which
appears in izy as iz or z, and in inya, ny, nia, &c., as
in or n. In Ef. (dialect) this same article appears as
k in ki he, and in Mg. (dialect) and Epi (d.), as r
in ri he, in Tag. as s in aiya he, in Mallicolo and Epi
as Hn ^i he; in My. d in diya he, and in Santo (d.) as m
in mo he, in this last as in Epi (d.) nao, no (Ef. nai),
the is the Anc. Se. u, o, while generally the Anc. i
prevails in Oc. in the pronoun "he," "she," "it." Now
we find this third personal pronoun with the article in
these various phonetic forms prefixed to the pronouns
of the first and second persons in Oc, signifying
literally he or this — I, or that — thou ; thus, Mg.
(dialects) rika and roky (ri with i, q^ with u) thou
(that — thou), Sumatra rektv, Motu lau (for laku), Lobo
kcku I (this — I), and thus, My. dika thou, dikau you,
daku I, Negrito (Phil.) dicamv, you, and thus Tag.
siya he, Negrito (Phil.) sikanie, Ef. ningami, nikam,
(and kingami), Mg. izaltay we, Negrito hica thou,
hicamu you, Mg. hianoA) you, hianareo ye, Mg. isika
(this — I — thou). This is the undoubtedly true ex-
planation of these forms, which are all mere phonetic
variations of one original ; thus Griffiths {Mg, Gr)
explains izaho rightly, as " from izy he, and oho I."
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
CO OCEANIA.
The change of the article I to m (as in Himyaritic)
at once explains the m (changed to v in Tah. vav, I) of
My. mika thou (Motlav hiek, nek), and My. maHka
they, those, Ef. nara, inira, Mg. izareo. So Ef.
kinau I, and the ki he, has the Se. i, as the Sa. 'o (as
in 'o a'Uy i.e., ko aku 1) has the Se. o (or u). And
these demonstratives, or articles prefixed to the pro-
noun third person, often distinctly retain their per-
sonal significance even when used with other words, as
the interrogative pronouns and proper nouns, and
have, therefore, been called the "Personal Article."
Of these below as they occur. The k form of the
article occurs, as all other forms of it, in My., as
** unconscious " in kangkaii for kiangkau you, Malli-
colo keingko thou (kei or gei he), Paama keiko you
{kei he), Ef. kaiig, dialects navg, ang^ Ef. ningita I —
thou, Ef. dialects nikita and keingita, or keiA;ita, Fiji
koi keda, koi for koya, i.e., koia, Sam. 'o ia, he, that.
The article is attached to the original Se. personal
pronoun third plural in Ef. as ir or er — thus, ei'u or
iru, and with the consonant elided in one dialect ^u or
^w they (compare this pronoun in Heb. with the same
article) ; and to the Se. plural demonstrative used in
Oc. for " they," in Mg. izareo, My. mamka {n to m), Ef.
nara, Sam. *o i la (tou), Tag. sila, Tanna ila, Paama
keila, Mallicolo kara. This, the Anc. common Se.
plural demonstrative, is given above : here the article
is treated of. The article in Oc, as in the Anc. lan-
guages, is prefixed also to the demonstrative pronouns
(see those above, as ti in Ef. nia, nin, and nanga and
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
PREPOSITIONS AND THE ARTICLE. 61
netn this ; nanga or nang is also used for a relative
pronoun, and corresponds to My. Tien, a phonetic varia-
tion of yang (iang, article as i); another variation
is Java sang (article as s), and still another is
Java kaTig (article as k). In Ef. the article appears
as k in kin, kia this, and kintii, kistu this here, and ke
or ki this ; it appears as iz in Mg. izato this, and as ir
in Mg. iroa that, Ef . irw and iri or e?*i6, eri this. Ef .
erti and eri, this, is er article, and the Se. u and i third
personal pronoun singular (Ef. without article ua and
i this), so Mg. iroa. The original Se. demonstrative
i* is quite different from k the variation of the article,
and was usually suffixed as it is in Oceanic, thus Ef.
erik this, Mg. io (perhaps for iko, iko), Java iku, iki,
ika, the u and i suffixed to the final k being the u and
i third personal pronoun as in Eth. elekw, Mg. ireo
(perhaps ireho, ireko), Arb. olaika, Mg. and My., with
article, izareo, maHkct those, these, they. With Ef.
eHk, compare Mg. iHkitra, irokatra that, and as to
these two final demonstratives k and t in the latter
compare Eth. eleketu those. The final demonstrative
Eth. tu, of which the u is that of the Se. third personal
pronoun, appears also only as a final in Oc, as in Mg.
izato, Ef. Tietu, nistu, kistu, Mg. ity. My. itu this, Eth.
elontu, Mg. ireto these.
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
CHAPTER V.
The Relative and Interrogative.
As the relative in the Se. languages, as in most
others, is originally demonstrative, so in Oc. there is
little difference between them ; but here also, both in
the Anc. and Mod. dialects, the use of the article is to
be noted. Thus the relative in My. is the yang with its
phonetic variation "tien, Java sang and kang, just
noticed, Ef. nang^ in all of which the article occurs
prefixed to the demonstrative n (ng) ; so in Mg. izany,
and the same article prefixed to another demonstra-
tive Sam. Uy Tah. fe, tei, Ef. te, Mg. izao. In Arb.
the relative was composed of the article, al or ely pre-
fixed to a demonstrative thus, alladi, but the Mod.
Arb. " vulgar form, for all numbers and genders,"
namely, elll (also ell and d), best compares with the
Sam. Ze, Mg. izdo, Ef. te, Tah. <e, tei. The Se. and Oc.
article is sometimes itself used as a relative pronoun.
With Arb. TnaUy ma (Heb. mi, onaft), compare Tah.
mea (Sam. and Ma. mea) and mena^ whatever, who-
ever, anything, such a one.
The Interrogative. — With this also in Oc. the
article is to be noted. The interrogative What ? is in
Mg. ino, inona and ovi (in ovi-ana, what time ?
when ?), My. apa, apatah, and pa (in pa-bila what
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
THE RELATIVE AND INTERROGATIVE. 63
time? when?), mana, Ef. safa^ contracted ad, and
safana, contracted sdTia, also dialect nqfite, Sam. a,
o le a, 86 a: in these s, le and se, and n are varying
forms of the article (see above).
My. apa, Ef. afa, a, Sam. a (Rarat. aa, Ma. aha),
Mg. ovi, compare with Arb. ayuma, contracted a*ma,
Mod. Arb. ama. The na in inona, aafana, is the Se.
enclitic dem. Tta. Himyaritic also changes the com-
mon Se. m of the interrogative into b or v,
Mg. pa compares with Arb. ma, Heb. mah, and My.
"iiiana with Amharic men, Syr. mo?io (mana).
Mg. mo, Tag. ano, compares with Syr. a* no, Eth.
My. apatah, Ef. a/i^e, have the dem. t suffixed, and
compare with Mod. Arab, made what ?
Sam. le fea, se fea which ? Ha. Aea, which ? what ?
when? where? Tah. both pea and hea; fea is con-
nected with mea, mena, has elided the n, and com-
pares with My. Taana.
The interrogative Who ? is in Mg. ^^ou?/, i^CL> My.
siyapa or siapa, and contracted sapa, Ef. S6 or sei,
dialect /e, Sam. o ai. The 0, ^^r, and Ef . a are forms of
the article, is the Sam. dem. above explained, and
My. ai is the " personal article," that is, the third
personal pronoun with the article prefixed to it.
Hence My. aiapa, aapa, Mg. zovy, denotes literally
he or she what or which (apa, ovi) ? what person ? who?
Mg. iza, Santo iae, Ef. ae, compares with Eth. ay,
Arb. ay (ai), and Tag. aino (Tanna ain) has the
** personal article," and compares with Syr. a'no.
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
64 OCEANIA.
Sam, ai (Maori ^va^, Tah. vai), Ef. dialect fiy
Eromanga me, dialect wi, Heb. mi, and My. Ttiana,
Amh., Mod. Arb, and Ch. man.
Indefinites. — These interrogatives are used as indefi-
nites, signifying " whatever/' " something," &c., as My.
viana, Tah. menu and m£a, Syr. mono ; My. apa. Ma.
aha, Ef . safa, Arb. ama ; Mg. zavatra, Ef. riafatuna,
namatuna, fatuna, matuna (ma, and tu7ia=M.g.
tony this), Arb. ma, Heb. mah, Ch. mah, mahdi ; and
reduplicated Mg. apaapa, Heb. meumah, Mg. wa iTiOTia
71a inona.
So signifying " whoever," " someone," &c., as Ef. se
Mota isei, Mg. i^a, Arb. ay.
The interrogative What ? is used in Ef., as in Arb.,
after nouns in an indefinite sense, " however," " some
or other ; " and after verbs preceded by the negative
adverb it is used in Ef. (mau), Fotuna (ma), and Aniwa
(mana), in the same indefinite sense as in Amharic
(771 or 7)1?).
The word for " man," in Ef. nata, is used, as is the
same word in Aramaic, enasha, and as in Heb.,
to denote "someone," "anyone," (cf. German man,
French on), " each," " everyone." If Ef. " every " is
also expressed by sera, for which see the numeral 1
below.
Other indefinites are My. pulan, Arb. fulan " such
a one." " Such a one," " such a thing," is expressed in
Mg. by ano, anona, ranona, ianona (ra and i " per-
sonal articles ") ; My. anu, anun, and sianu (si " per-
sonal article"), Florida hanu, Arb. hanu.
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
THE RELATIVE AND INTERROGATIVE. 65
The Reflexives. — In the Se. languages we find
" self," " selves," expressed by various words with the
nominal suffixes, as Eth. rees head, reeso his head,
" himself," Amh. eraw himself " he." In Arb. occurs
also nafs (Heb. Tiefes) soul, ruh spirit, an eye, essence ;
Heb. etsem, gerem bone, guf body. The word thus
used in Mg, is teria body, self (My. den self) ; compare
Arb. tun the body. The word that is used in My., as
tena in Mg., with the nominal suffixes, to denote self,
selves, is diri, compare Eth. lali self, selves, as My.
dirikamu, Eth. kdikemu yourselves. If Java dewe is
identical with My. diri (if My. orang, Java uwong,
wong man), it has come to be in that dialect a substi*
tute for the pronoun third person as the above-men-
tioned ersw in Amh. In the Se. languages self, selves,
is often expressed by the "reflexive forms" of the
verb; it is thus, as we shall see below, also in the
Oc dialects.
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
CHAPTER VL
Adverbial Particles and Conjunctions.
The common particle of comparison signifying "as,"
Heb. A;*, ha, Arb. ka, seen also in Arb. kama, Heb.
kemo, Eth. kama, zakama, kamaze as (as what, that
as what, as what this), Heb. kazek, Arb. kada, hakada.
Arm. kedi, a% a^kan, da% da'k hono, hokan, hokut,
as, thus, so. These are combinations of the particle k'
as, and the interrogative, relative, and demonstrative
particles. The same are seen in Ef . H, My. kiyan
"as," Ef. kua so, Mg. ahoana "however," Ef. kite,
Java kadi (Arm. kedi) as, Ef . taka, takan, Mg. tahaka,
Arm. da'ka, da'k hono, "as," "that as," Mg. hoatra
"like," "as." See further below on the interrogative
adverbs.
The same particle occurs with the preposition be, ha,
prefixed in (perhaps, see verb forms below, My.
hagai, contracted hagi) Heb. hekoh, (My. bagai-mana)
Eth. bakama, (My. bagini) Heb. beken " as." If My.
baga is same as Ef. baka, Fiji vaka, it, like them,
belongs below (verb forms).
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
ADVERBIAL PARTICLES AND CONJUNCTIONS. 67
Adverbs of Place. — The following are the demon-
strative particles above noted : —
here (this)
there (that)
Mg.
eo, eto, ety
eny, ery
My.
siniy sinan
sitUf Sana, sanan
Tah.
net
na, ra
Ma.
konei
Jcona
Tong.
kO'heni, a^heni
ko-hena, a-hena
Ef.
i, 86, aia, esas, nanga, &c»
ina, esan, esanien, &c.
Arb.
' hona, hahona
hannaf hinna, Jwnna, &c.
Heb.
hennah, zeh, ^hi
sham, haldh, Syr. hdl
We see the article in My. aini (ini this), situ (itw
that) ; Bugis kotu, Ma. konei, kona ; Bugis lomaie (n
to m, Ma. konei), Java kene, and riki here {iki this).
These occur with the prepositions prefixed as with be,
ha, Eth. bahya here, bazya there; Haw. maaTiei,
mcdaila, and with le, - la, li, Syr. leko here, lehol
there ; My. diaini, diaana ; Tong. giheni, gihena ;
Sam. iinei, Una, iUa, io ; Mg. ax>, aty, any.
Connected with these are the Oc. " directive par-
ticles '* :—
hither thither
Sam. mai atu, ane
Ef. mat hanotu, haina, ban
Thus the i of mai is "here" (Ef.), and the hv of
atu, &c., is the tu in My. situ, and the ina, n^, n, of
baina, ban, is the above ma, na, " there." The only
question is as to the nature of the prefix, ba, ma, a, to
these pronominal adverbial particles. Now, these
words in Ef. are verbs, rnai to come here, banotw.
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
68 OCEANIA.
baina, ban (also bano and bani) to go there ; and it is
a fact that one of the commonest verbs in Ef. is 6a to
go, also to enter in (to anything) as i ba rartui he
enters into a canoe or sliip, "go on board a ship,"
" embark." The simplest explanation, therefore,
would seem to be that Ef . mai (for bai) is ba i, " go
here," i.e., '* come here," and ba Tiotu, ba iTia, ba n,
"go there." But another and better explanation is
given below (Verb Forms, Causative Form) by which
mai is "make for here," and atu, &c., "make for
there." This latter explanation is confirmed to
certainty as correct by the equivalent expressions in
Mg. Toankety, "come hither" (ety), and vianJceny,
manlcery go thither {eny, ery), and that these Mg.
words are "departiculative" verbs of the causative
form (see below) is beyond all doubt. The question
as to the origin of these (Pacific) " directive particles,"
rendered illustrious by the labours of Bopp, is thus
finally set at rest.
The Interrogative Adverbs. — ^Where ? is expressed
in My. by the above maifia, Sam. fea, and in Ef. by the
above safa, sa. In Mg. it is expressed by aiza, Heb.
ezeh, Mg. aia, Heb. eyah, Ef. e, Heb. e, and in Ef. with
article, ae.
How ? Why ? is expressed in Ef . by kua, kuan, or
ngvu, ngnen, Mg. ahoana, aJcory, of which the A, or k,
or ng, is the above particle of comparison " as," and ua
or the interrogative, the final tia, o^ being demon-
stratives; compare My. bagimana (bagi "as"), and Ef,
kasafa, kasana, kasa, as what ? dialect kaimbe (Jcaibe)
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
ADVERBIAL PARTICLES AND CONJUNCTIONS. 69
Epi kavai, Tigre kamai. Tongan fefe (Sam. pefed),
Heb. bamah, Eth. bament, Am. biha, Arb. fima
(why ?), have the preposition be, ba. Ef . tdkan, Syr.
alhano : the Syr. is interrogative, particle of compariT*
son (above), and demonstrative, the Ef. the same with
article t' prefixed. The Sam. faapefea how ? My.
mangapa why ? Fiji vahaevei how ? are " departicula-
tives," Causative Form (see Verb Forms below). Ef,
tahalise, or tabalisafa is taba to be like, le thing, and
86 or 8a/a what ? Ef. ^a6a to be like, Mg. tovy, My.
dama (in daTnoMyan like so), Heb. damah, Arm.
diema to be like.
When ? Ef. sifi, rang, siji nang what time ? and
nangasa, i.e., nanga ea time what ? My.ya6i?a what
time ? &iia mana time what ? Mg. oviana, ovi what,
ana time ? Sam. anafea time what ? This word
" time" without the article in Mg. ana, Arb. an, has
the article in My. dan, Ef. ran{i, and ran, nan^, lang.
In Arb. also ayyan (for at/ an what time ?) denotes
"when?"
How many ? is expressed in My. by barapa {apa
what ?), Mg. firy, Java pira, Ef. 6i«a and bia, Sam.
j^; this word is a "departiculative" of the reflexive
form (see Verb Forms below).
Interrogative particles are My. kah, Ef. ko, Syr. ka,
and My. tah, Ef. ta, Tigre da, and Mg. no, Eth. nu.
Adverbs of affirmation are My. eny, Sam. en<i, Arb.
inna, and My. iya, Sam. i, Ef. ia, io, Arb. 'iy, Mod.
Syr. ^*, ye\ and indefinite affirmative My. lah, Ef. Za,
Arb. Zo.
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
70 OCEANIA.
Adverbs of Negation. — Sam. le (Maori te), Faama ro,
Heb. le, la, lo, Ef . dialects ti^ tu, ta, di, ndi, tai, aa
(prohibitive), and in the first syllable of tab, tiba, riba,
•' not," and of tika, rika, tsika, tdia " is — not," Sam. leaiy
(for lehai). As to the 6 or &a in tiba it is the pre-
position V (bo, ba) as in Eth. aWxi, aJXbo is — not, aJX,
Heb. al not, and as in Arb. niafi is not (ma not), and
f he ha (in tika), also means " is " (see below), being a
verb substantive. The change of the original Z to r,
(/, t8, 8, is to be noted. We have the same negative in
Jly. ta, and in the first syllable of tida (compare Amh;
lela, verb substantive Eth. halo, Amh. ala), tada,
tiada (My. ada is, are, Amh. ala), and as ja in javgan
(prohibitive). We have the same negative in Mg. tay,
and in the first syllable of tdary, tsiadry (ary, adry,
My. ada), diahoe, isia. My. tak, Ef. tika, tsika, taia,
Sam. le'ai, Arb. la yakun, la yaku is — ^not, literally
"not — is," and in the last syllable of Mg. aza
(prohibitive). Mg. tay, iay, taiay (iay, verb substantive)
compares with Arb. laiaa, leia, Ch. lo ita, Syr. lathi
The prohibitive has the imperative particle thus : Ef .
ba aa, dialect nga aa, or ka aa "that not," My^
jangan (ja ngan not that, not shalt), Mg. aza (a za
" that not "), and the change of t to a, j, z, is partly
owing to the emphasis natural to a prohibitory
command, and partly to the neighbourhood of the
imperative particle.
My. bukan compares with Arb. ma yakun, Epi
maJca with Arb. (Bagdad) maku, for nia yakun, ma
yaku, the final n of this verb substantive being elided.
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
ADVERBIAL PARTICLES AND CONJUNCTIONS. 71
The Arb. verb substantive kana (Eth. hon^ Amh. Aon,
& to A as in Mg. diahoe, cf, Sam yai) sometimes elided
the final n.
A third negative appears in Epi (dialect) i, Eth. %
Mg. ai not, and in the first syllable of Sam. i'ai Qai as
in Wat) Tonga ikai is — not. These three, fe, ma, and i,
are the common Se. negative adverbs^ and the first in
Oc, as in the Anc. languages, is by far the commonest
and most used. It is important, also, to note the Se.
verbs substantive used with these negative particles
in Oc. as in the Anc. languages.
Conjunctions. — ^Ma. and Ha. a, Rarat. and Tah. e,
Arb. and Eth. wa, Heb. and Arm. wi, " and " : Ef.
ma, me, Sam. ma, " and," literally " with," " together
with," and My. (with article) dan, same as preposition
(above) Arb. ma', &c. Hale remarks that the pro-
nouns perform the office of conjunctions, so Ef. nara
(they), Epi nai (he), nalo (they), " and " : compare,
perhaps, Mg. art/. For My. maka, Mg. manko, see
Verb Forms below. As final conjunctions signifying
"that," " in order that," " to," occur Mg. mha, Ef. 6a,
mba, Arb. fa (as final conjunction) : Mg. ka. My.
akan and ngan (in jangan), Ef. ka and nga, Sam. ia.
Ha. i. Ma. and Rarat. kia, Tong. ke is the preposjtion
(above) which in the Anc. languages also, Arb., Heb.,
Arm., was used as a final conjunction. Led by the
phonetic similarity and use, I formerly compared it
with the final conjunction Heb. ki, Arb. ka. Another
final conjunction is in Sam. ina, Arb. en, enna.
Interjections. — Ef. o (after nouns), Eth. o (before
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
72 OCEANIA.
nouns) vocative: Ef. uancb, Mg. inay, Ma. ina, Heb.
hinneh, Amh. enaho, there ! behold ! look out ! As a
vocative is used My. and Arb. ya, Ha. e; Mg. and Heb.
he, lo ! Mg. akory, aJcary la, Ef . akori la (see la adverb
and ri demonstrative, above), ako, Heb. ekah, literally
"how?" In Ef. and Heb. used in lamenting and
deploring, as Ef., in bewailing the dead, ako tai O
alas, brother ! ako ki nt* " woe is me ; " but in
Ef. and Mg. used also as a mere exclamation of sur-
prise. My. ahi, ayi, ayue, Sam. aue, Heb. hm, awoy,
Arb. awi, wa, Eth. wai " alas \ "
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
CHAPTER VII.
Auxiliaries and Particles of Tense.
The verb substantive (see above, under the negative
adverbs, tika, Arb. kana, yaku, aku, i,e, ku) is used in
the Mod., as in the Anc. languages, as an auxiliary of
tense. Thus in Tonga gtia,gu, present tense ; Sam. *wa,
present and past ; Tah. tta, Ef. dialect kul, past. Hale
observes that it is used with all the tenses, and that in
Ma. it is generally ka, so in Ef . it is usually ka, another
form of which seems to be ko. Between Ef. ka and ko,
the difference is that ka denotes the past, ko present
continuance of a state, quality, or action, thus i ka tok
he stopped, i ko toko he is continuing stopping, and
compare Ma. " ka pai good (is good), ka hore no, it is
not'* (Ef . tika not is, is — not). Thus ka and kua, whether
we regard their phonetic form or use, may be regarded
as (ka) a relic of the Anc. " perfect" of this verb (Arb.
kana), and (kua) of its Anc. "imperfect" (Arb. ku).
My. <xda (Amh. ala, Eth. halo) is used like " is," "are"
in Eng., " is " or " are stopping." In Ef. the verb sub*
stautive thus used is bo, as bo uia, is good, bo toko is
stopping, bo bisa is speaking. Now this is the Se.-Oc.
preposition, used in Ef . as a verb substantive, bi, with
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
74 OCEANIA.
o suffixed instead of i; bi, as already stated, is the pre-
position (used also in Arb. and Eth. as a verb substan-
tive), and o is the pronoun third person, which also is
used in the Anc languages as a verb substantive,
and the preposition V (in the Se. languages) prefixed
to a verb gives a gerundive sense, denoting continu-
ance. Thus bo (dialects mo,/o, uo, o) is literally "in
being," continuing being, going on being ; bo cannot be
used before a substantive, and is only used before
verbs (or adjectives) to give this gerundive sense. See
more below on bo, kai, ka.
An auxiliary tense particle, which is, as Bopp
rightly thought, of pronominal origin, is Mg. n' (pre-
fixed), Sam. and Tong. na, Tanna n, in, denoting the
past ; but in Fiji it denotes the future, in Motlav the
present, and in Tagala the present and the past. It is
the Se.-Oc. demonstrative (above), used also in Amh.
(ncL) as a " verb substantive," Heb. hinneh used before
the verbal noun (participle) for the present, the future,
and the past of the finite verb ; Arb. inne, Eth. ene.
In Mg. no " was" is the past tense of the verb substan-
tive o, but also sometimes means " is ;" compare the o
in the above Ef. bo.
The particle of the future is in Mg. K (prefixed),
My. akan, Ef. nga (ka) ; Mg. ho "will be," is the
future tense of the verb substantive o, o as in no, and
in Ef . bo. Mg. h\ My. dkan, Ef. nga {ka) is the pre-
position " to" (for which see above), and the same
preposition in the Anc. languages is used also as a
final conjunction "that," and prefixed to the verb or
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
AUXILIARIES AND PARTICLES OF TENSE. 75
verbal noun sometimes expresses the future and some-
times the gerund (see next paragraph below). This
preposition in Chaldee is prefixed to the verb substan*
tive, and the compound is used as an auxiliary of the
future, or denoting, as Mg. Ao, " will be" (literally " to
be" or " that be") ; so Ef. nga uo, compound auxiliary
of the future (dialects nga ho, and ngo — cf. Mg. hx>
with this latter), « will be " (literally " to be," or " that
be "). See above, the final conjunction.
In the Anc. languages both of these prepositions
(for instance, in Heb.) were prefixed to what is the
verb in Oc. (that is, to the verbal noun) forming a
gerund. In Mod. Syr. the preposition V is prefixed
to what was the Anc. infinitive forming the Mod.
present participle and the present tense (denoting
simple continuance like Ef. ho before verbs). It also
forms a much-used participle or gerund in Ef. in such
phrases as "he answered and said," Greek "he
answered saying," Ef. i hisa ho till (i.e., ho-tili or
hotUi). In another Ef. dialect this latter use of ho is
expressed by the other preposition (see preceding
paragraph) ka, nga, as i hisa kai till (the i of kai is
the article) ; so Mg. Ax&, as Ef. t kani ho huka, orikani
kai huka, Mg. nihinana izy ka voky, he ate to being
filled. In Ef. the preposition may be omitted, as {
kani huka, " he ate filled," i.e., " being filled." In Fiji
the preposition ki is thus used, as " lako ki nioce, go and
(to) sleep." (Haz., Or., p. 52.)
The Ma.-Ha. e, which Bopp compared with My. de
(di), is the same preposition (occurring as i, see above
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
76 OCEANIA^
on the prepositions) by elision of the consonant (Heb.)
Arm. le, My. de, Sam. e), and is the sign of continuance
(present), and of the future ; its force is well given in
the Tahiti Dictionary as " answering generally to the
English auxiliaries would, could, should, ought, may,
can, will, and shall." In Heb., used in the same way,
it gives a gerundive sense ; in Ch., with the force of a
final conjunction, it gives a " conjunctive, optative, and
imperative power," and, as above remarked, with the
verb substantive suffixed it denotes " will " or " shall."
Probably Sam. e (like Ef. dialect o, for bo) is the third
personal pronoun, or verb substantive, with the pre-
fixed consonant of the preposition elided. In Sam. it
seems that it sometimes occurs as te, My. de or di (the
same preposition) is also used as a sign or particle of
the future tense.
Particles of Mood. — The Infinitive or Subjunctive,
it need scarcely be said, has the same preposition ** to"
or " that," as in the future, thus Mg. h' (prefixed) ho
(separate, before the verb). My. aJcan, di (as iya andak
akan berlayar he intends to sail, iang tiada de, or di,
makan orang which men are not to eat), Ef . nga (ka,
K dialect), Sam. e sometimes i, Arm. le ; the radical
meaning of each of these particles (they are all f orms,
some with addition of another particle, as Mg. hx), of
the one preposition " to," see above) is " to." Thus
Mg. mangataka Aandeha " I ask to go," tsy manam*
bary ho hanina izy " he has no rice to eat ;" Sam. ou
te musu i alu " I am unwilling to go," ou te musu e
saili " I am unwilling to seek ;" Ef. i tili i nga tok " he
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
AUXILIARIES AND PARTICLES OF TENSE. 77
said he to stop," i.e., that he, or that he should stop.
So Arb. li, Heb. and Ch. le, to, that, in order that
(before the verb, or infinitive). See this Se.-Oc. pre-
position above.
The Imperative. — The foregoing has sometimes a
precative or permissive power, as Ef . i nga tok " he to
stop," that is, he may stop, let him stop, dialect he tok,
k' (for nga), e he, tok stop, he may, or let him stop,
" that he stop," same order as Arb. liya'^fira that he
forgive {li = k'). The second person imperative plural
in Ef. ko (of which the o is a fragment of the
pronoun second person plural) as A;o tok "stop ye"
(literally let, or that, ye stop) has the same order as
ke tok let him stop. In the imperative second person
singular in Ef. ba, in like manner a, is a fragment of
the pronoun second person singular, as ba tok stop
thou, literally b* that, a thou, tok stop ; for ba " that,"
Arb. fa, see above, the final conjunctions. In one
dialect of Ef. this ba is used instead of the above nga,
or k*, in the future, and infinitive or subjunctive. In
Sam. ia, i {kia, ki) is a sign of the imperative and
subjunctive ; and ina is also used, see the final con-
junctions. In the same way was used Arb. li. Arm.
le, Arb. ka, en, enna, and fa. In Mg. My., and some-
times in Sam., but never in Ef., the verb alone may be
used for the imperative, as in English.
The Anc. Se. mimation, or nunation, or the suffix-
ing of final m or n, as, e.g., in Himyaritic, is found in
Oc, that is, words are found (see, for instance, the
numerals below) in Oc. with this m or n that had
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
78 OCEANIA,
been suffixed to them in Anc. times. This final n is
found sometimes variously changed to ng, k, &c.
Distinct traces are also found of the Anc vowel
endings, especially u or o, the Anc. ending of
the nominative, but without, of course, any case
signification.
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
CHAPTER VIIL
Formative Particles of the Derived Verb Stems.
The Oc. verb is a verbal noun (substantive or
adjective), as Bopp has rightly remarked. It corres-
ponds to or is the Anc. Se. verbal noun to which the
article was or might be prefixed, and which was used
both in an active and a passive tense. Hence the
common Se. verb-form pai-ticles often occur prefixed
to the article : that is, the particle is prefixed to an
ancient verbal noun with the article. The article
combined thus with the verb-form particle in Oc, as
if it were a part of it (suffixed to it), assumes all the
phonetic forms already familiar to us, namely, I, r, g,
ka, ha, n, ng, m, and often modifies the initial conso-
nant of the word to which it is prefixed, and coming
as it does between the stem-word and the formative
prefix it sometimes modifies also the latter. In the
Se.-Oc. languages there are only three verb-form
particles, two of which n and t, are reflexive (and
reciprocal), and the third a (hay ta, sa), causative.
These are sometimes combined, causative-reflexive or
reflexive-causative. To these in the Anc. verbal
noun the formative m was very often prefixed : hence
we find it very often prefixed in the Mod. languages
in the verbs (that is, Anc verbal nouns). The Oc
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
80 OCEANIA-
verb being a verbal noun may be used as an adjective
(participle), and often is used also as a verbal sub-
stantive, though, as will be shown, there are Mod.
methods analogous to and partly identical with the
Anc. of distinguishing both the verbal adjective
(participle), and verbal substantive (infinitive), from
the verb. The Anc. Se. verb was originally a noun,
and as to the form-partides now to be considered or
compared, Halevy has remarked — " Ces particules sont
visiblement des themes pronominaux qui servent aussi
k la flexion des noms, et, veritable trait-d'union entre
ces deux categories de mots, montrent d'une mani^re
concluante que verbe et nom ^taient originairement
conf ondus dans la conception linguistique des Semites."
Both in the Anc. and Mod. languages these particles
have sometimes become radicalized or fossilized, form-
ing secondary ground stems, to which the same or the
other particles are again prefixed as if they were
primitive stems ; these radicalized particles we may
call the unconscious verb-form particles. We may
now consider as 'prefixed —
1. The causative particle, Arb., Eth., Amh., Syr. a,
Heb. h, hi, Assy, sha, a, Himy. sa, ha, Syr. aa, tha,
Heb. ta, ti, Eth. sa, ta, Amh. as. The first, a, in the
common form : to this the verbal noun formative was
prefixed in the Anc. languages giving ma, which in
Syr. became the Maphel form, the sole form in Mod.
Syr., and almost the sole, certainly the prevailing, form
in Oceania, owing to the Oc. verb being the Anc.
verbal noun. Thus we have in Mg. ma {fa, pa,mpa),
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
FORMATIVE PARTICLES OF DERIVED VERB STEMS. 81
and, probably by elision of the m, a (in certain cir-
cumstances), My. ma, Madura a, Ef. 6a, fa, Sam. fa :
this, with the article (prefixed originally, as explained,,
to the verbal noun), gives us Mg. Tnahxiy and Tnana,
Tixan, My. Ttian, the n (that is, the article, see its forms
above) being variously modified according to the
initial letter of the word to which it is prefixed,
which it also variously modifies, as also in My. ;
see Bopp, Miiller, and the Mg. and My. grammars
for the particulars of these modifications. Marsden
and Craufurd deem this n purely euphonic, but
Bopp has shown that it is not. The n (article) is
sometimes elided (or assimilated). Identical with Mg.
raaha is Ef. haha, faka; Sam. fa' a, Ma. whaka, Fiji
vaka. In this combination Mg. has the two forms of
the article (see above), n and h, My. (except in a few
instances) only the one, n, but also r, Ef. (except in a
few instances) and Sam. only the one, ka, *a.
There occurs also in Sam. ta (rare), Tahiti ta (fre-
quent), Ef. aa, si, My. sa, si, Mg. sa (rare). This, com-
bined with the article, gives Ef. (sala) sara.
2. The Reflexive n, Heb. (hin) na, ni, hi, and t,
Arb. in. Assy, na, Eth. an, in Arb. sometimes, in
Assy, often, assimilated. In Mg. in, Java in, Dayak
in, Haw. na. Comparatively rare in both the Anc»
and Mod. languages, the following being the common
reflexive particle : —
3. Reflexive, Heb. hith, Arm. ith, eth, Eth. ta, Arb.
ta, and it : in Heb. and Arb. the t or th sometimes
elided or assimilated. With the verbal noun pre-
7
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
82 OCEANIA.
formative m' (originally nia), Arb. mtUa, mota, mi\
Arm. meth, mith, Heb. mith, mit, ini\ Mg. mi {fi, pi,
mjpi), and i (m elided), Ef. hi, ji, My. ha or 6« (pc),
and, with article as r or i, 6ar, ^x*^, her, per, haZ, pal,
Sam. fe, Tag. mogr (gr, article. My. r), Battak mor,
Vanua Lava ver, Mota i;ar, Fi. vei, Oba inti, Mg. voa or
voi (article with its consonant elided).
There also occurs (without the preformative m) Mg.,
ta, My. ta, Ef. ta, Fiji ta, Mota to, Sam. ta ; and in My.
with article as r, tor or ter, in Mg. with article as n,
tan.
The above Mg. form, mi, with article as ha (as in
causative maJia), gives miAa.
4. The Eeflexive-Causative, a combination of 3
and 1 — Syr. ethma, Mg. tafa (frequent), Ef. taha (rare),
Oba tama, Mota tova, Florida tapa. The reflexive-
causative (or causative-reflexive) was pretty frequent
in the Anc. languages, and is just about as frequent
in Mg., in which, in addition to to/a, there occurs the
form (see mi above) mifa (frequent), with article as n,
m,ifany Tnifana, with " double article " mifanka.
These particles in the Mod. languages modifj'* the
meaning of the word to which they are prefixed
exactly as in the Anc. Thus, to take first the causa-
tive : —
Mg. vono act of killing, Tnamono to kill. My. hunoh,
causative mximbunoh, or mamwnoh, maninggi to
elevate, from tinggi high, Mg. mxiniay to create, from
isy to be, manamxiro to multiply, from maro many,
mamaka to root, send forth roots (make roots), from
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
FORMATIVE PARTICLES OF DERIVED VERB STEMS. 83
faka root. So Heb. hishrish to put forth roots,
shorish root, Arb. awraka to put forth leaves, warak
a leaf, Mg. mandravina to put forth leaves, ravina a
leaf. Another class of denominatives of the causative
form " denotes movement towards a place (compare to
make for a place)," as Arb. aaham to go to Syria
(sham Syria), athaTna to go to Tehama, Heb. heymin
to go to the right {yamin), Java malohu to go within
(labu), My. malaut to go to sea (laut), Toaniahrang
go to the other side of the water (sahrang), Ja.
aniabrang, Ja. mangwetan to go eastward (wetan),
manglor to go north {lor). Ma. whakawaAo to go
without (waho)j Mg. mankany to go there (any),
mankeo to go (come, make for) here (eo), mankaiza to
go where (aiza), Ef. bakae to go where {e where ?), Ef.
mai to go (come, make for) here (i), Sam. Tnai, com-
pare, perhaps, My. mari, Ef . baina to go there (ina),
Sam. atu to go there (tu), Ef. banotu to go there (tu,
or notu), Sam. aifie to go there (ne), a as in amata to
begin, make beginning (mata, Tahiti haamata, taniata
to make beginning, mata\ Java apadu to make dis-
pute (padu). This is the true explanation of these
remarkable words viai, atu, ane, which were so care-
fully investigated, though without success, by such
scholars as Bopp, Humboldt, and Buschmann.
Mg., My., Ef., Sam., ma^j/, or mate, die, dead, Mg.
mahafaty, Fiji vakamatea. My. marriate, Tah. haamate
to kill (Sam. tamate) ; Mg. velona, My. idup, Ef .
mawH, Fiji bula, Sam. ola, a being alive, life, living,
Ef. hakamauri, Fiji vakabula, Sam. faaola, Mg.
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
84 OCEANIA.
mamelona. My. mangidupi, to make or keep alive ;
Mg. vao, new, havdo newness (ha article), niahavao to
make new, or with article as nay maTiavao to make
new, so be great, hahe greatness, mahabe and manabe
to make great, and zava a being clear, mahazava and
manazava to make clear, enlighten. The causa-
tive particle is sometimes doubled, as Ef. fafa, Fiji
vaJcavaka, Mg. mampa, mampariy mampaha, mam-
panka. The Mg. manka has 'nka, " the double article,"
and mampan is for manpan.
As in the Anc. languages, e.^.. Art)., the Oc. causa-
tive form sometimes denotes the " getting into a state
or condition, acquiring a quality, obtaining or having
something, or becoming something of a certain kind "
— (Wright). These are denominatives, and are in-
transitive, because the " Semites " " regard as an act
what we view as a state." Thus Sam. faatoeaina^ to
become like an old man (toeainaj, Fiji vakadrau,
to make or have leaves (drau, see Mg. mandravina,
above), vakavuravura to become worldly {vuravurd),
^i, fakam^romina (meromina world), Fiji vdka-Sydney,
Ef. fakaSydney to be Sydneyfied, to make like
Sydney, Fiji vakaevei to make or become how ? {evei)y
Shm, faapefea (pefea), Mg. m/zninona to make what?
how much ? (inona), and reflexive-causative (see
below) mifaninona. SB,m.faapea(fea), (Fiji vakaevei).
My. mangapa why? The My. maka (see conjunctions)
compares with Mg. manko why, so (a pleonastic par-
ticle of conversation), and therefore belongs to this
form ; ko, as what, so (see above). Compare the Arb.
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
FORMATIVE PARTICLES OF DERIVED VERB STEMS. 85
X., which sometimes signifies " to become like " (make
oneself like).
In the Anc. languages, also, the causative form is
sometimes '* declarative or estimative," and the word
denotes to deem, think, or declare a person or thing to
be so and so. In Fiji " vakaocusana lit. to make bad ;
i,e., to declare to be so . . . vakadonuya to repre-
sent or speak of one as just, to approve of." In Ef. sa
or se (Anc. saphel), with article as ra, as seralesoko to
deem true (lesoko), believe, seratepalo to deem worth-
less (tepalo), despise. This meaning is pretty frequent
in Ef .
The following forms of the Oc. causative are iden-
tical with the Anc. forms known as the saphel^ shaphel,
taphely &c: — Sam. tamate to kill {mate), Tah. tama to
cleanse {ma clean), frequent in Tah. and called " the
causative form " {Tah. Grammar)^ Ef. sigiri to
strengthen {jgara strong), sahera ki to scatter {beray
reflexive tabera scattered), My. sabar to scatter, re-
flexive tabur, and perhaps Mg. sakelikia to carry under
the arm (helikia armpit), Sam. hdlulu to shake {lulu).
Haw. haluli {luli, reflexive naluli),
2. The rarer Reflexive (middle, passive) n, Heb.
niphal, Arb. vii. {infal) occurs in Haw. as nahal torn
{hal to tear). Hale describes the form with na as a
kind of adjective with a passive sense, and Pratt the
Sam. form with nga — as made neuter verbs by this
prefix. This prefix occurs as in in Dayak (F. Muller).
This in is sometimes infixed in Tagala, Formosa, Java,
Battak, and My. (F. Muller). So also, though rarely,
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
86 OCEANIA.
in Mg., dj^fitaka Ae^teM, finataka deceived, fa/oka wipe,
finaoka wiped ; frequent in Javanese. The Arb. xiv.
and XV., and the third of quadriliterals infix this in
between the second and third radicals.
8. The common reflexive (middle, passive, reci-
procal) : see above, under 3, for the Anc. and Mod.
forms of this particle. Examples : — Mg. mi' and voa;
as milahatra to aiTange himself (lahatra), arranged,
causative mandahatra to arrange, set in order (any-
thing), and voalahatra arranged; veiy frequent in Mg.,
and always contrasted with the causative. My. bar,
holy ha, or her, bel, be, as berajar, or belajar to learn
{ajar) : " the intransitive or neuter verb," the r or I is
the article. Ef. bi or fi, as biauli, or fiauli (causative
bdauli or faauli) to take the place of each other {auli
take the place of), or to keep on doing so, bUito to go
backwards and forwards between two places (liu to
return), fiatu {atu to smite) to smite or kill each
other, as in war. Sam. feanu to spit (anu) : this form
in Sam. is commonly reciprocal (Pratt), thus with the
preposition *i Qci) suffixed fealua 'i to go from place to
place (alw to go), or back and forth, or the final i (to
be explained below), fealofani to love one another
(alofa love), Fiji veilomani (loma). The artice in My.
bavy pal is r or I; in Mg. miha (causative maha) it is ha,
as tsara good, hataara goodness, causative mahatsara,
(and manatsara) to make better, ameliorate, reflexive
Tnihatsara to become, or grow better, fotsy white*
hafotsy whiteness, reflexive mihafotsy to grow white,
causative mamotsy to whiten : with niihafotsy compares
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
FORMATIVE PARTICLES OF DERIVED VERB STEMS. 87
My. berputih to be white. In Ef. bi, fi. Fiji vei, Oba
voa, Banks Islands var, ver, va\ Solomon Islands faiy
fei, this form is often reciprocal, and in My. bar, ber,
ba,be, Mg. mi,miha, reflexive (passive, neuter). In the
Anc. languages^ e.g., in Arb. and Heb., it is reflexive,
reciprocal, passive. ** Out of the reflexive arises
the reciprocal signification." The reciprocal im-
plies plurality ; the idea of plurality is often marked
in Fi. vei, Tagala mag ( = My. bar, g for r) ; another
form of the same idea is frequency of the act, keep on
doing, see Ef., above. Thus ta, in Sam., " expresses
repeated action," and so mag in Tagala. In some
cases this form, like the Arb. viii., agrees so much
with the simple form that both " may be translated
by the same word." The Anc. method of expressing
the reflexive of the intensive was by prefixing the
reflexive particle ta, &c., to the intensive form, Arb. ii.,
Heb. Piel. The Mod. expresses the same by such
forms as Ef. tagaragara (gara strong, causative sigiri
to strengthen) very strong, in which the redupli-
cation is analagous to the Anc. doubling or redupli-
cation of the intensive form. Another Mod. method
is the doubling or reduplication of the formative
prefix itself, as Ef. bifi, Fiji veivei, My. beper, Mota
varvar.
This prefix (Arb., Eth., ta) appears as ta in Fiji, Ef.,
and Solomon Islands, as Ef. tagaragara very strong,
ttibera. My. tabur (see above) scatter. With article as
r it is frequent in My. as tar, ta* forming a kind of
" passive participle " (reflexive-passive), as tarbalik
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
88 OCEANIA.
inverted (balik), iaxbuni hidden (buni), Sam. tapuni
to shut. For this ta in Mg., see under 4, below.
A number of words in the Oc. dialects have ma, mi,
&c., equivalent to the Mg vfii, My. bar, bay and appear
as verbal adjectives, the formative having been prefixed
in the Anc. or intermediate period ; thus My. Unmah, Mg.
"inalemy, malem^ylemy, Ef. Tnailum, mailuTtduni soft.
In this word mai (Fiji vei) is in another Ef. dialect ma
as in Mg. malemy ; Ef, Tiialingi, Sam. 7)ialingi spilt,
Ef. lin-gi to pour out, My. bartuwah and batuwah old,
mature. A very Anc. word is in My. barapa (apa),
Mg. Jiryy Ja. 2>iray Ef. biaa and bia, Sam. fia how
many ? The My. barapa has 6ar, the reflexive
particle, with article as r ; in Ef. the article appears
as s, and elided, in the others as in My., r. The
final part is the interrogative pronoun (see above).
The word seems literally to denote " they what
themselves " ? how many ? In Ef. it is never used
of bulk, or in the sense of how much ? In My.
it denotes how much ? — literally " it what s itself " i
and also how many ?
4. The reflexive-causative : see above under 4.
Examples : — Mg. tafasolo substituted (solo substitute),
tafaiditra brought in (iditra enter) : frequent in Mg.
Like Syr. ethmaphel it is the reflexive (passive) of
Maphel, as Syr. masken to make poor, ethmasken made
poor. Ef . causative balanga to raise (lamga), tabalanga
raised, raised itself, become raised; so Mota tavaul
untied, become untied (vJ, to untie), Oba tamamrus
{rums) slipped off", become slipped oflT (Codrington).
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
FORMATIVE PARTICLES OF DERIVED VERB STEMS. 89
Mg. mifandahcttra arrange one another, causative
mandahatra (lahcUra), Tnifankatia love one another
(mankatia, hatia, ha article, tia to love). This is the
common reciprocal in Mg. ; in the Anc. languages,
also, the reflexive-causative, expressed sometimes the
reciprocal, for instance in Syr. (eshtaphel). Corres-
ponding to Mg. mi/a, Tnifan, and " double article " (as
in causative manka) mifankay are Fiji veivaka, Araga
veiva (Oodrington), and Ef. bifa.
5. The Causative-Reflexive (frequent in Ethiopic).
Mg. reflexive inUahatra, with article mihatsara, causa-
tive-reflexive mampilahatra, mampihatsara, to cause
to arrange himself, to cause to grow or become better
{tsara good, see above), pretty frequent in Mg.
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
CHAPTER IX.
Formative Particles of the Verbal Noun.
The Verbal Noun (substantive and adjective). — In
the Se.-Oc. verbal nouns are, or may be, formed from
each stem or verb-form. To the Anc. verbal noun
was often prefixed the article. The article is often
found prefixed (the unconscious article) to an Oc. verb
(that is, an Anc; verbal noun). In the Oc. dialects a
verbal noun is often formed simply by using the
article (Mod. form) with the verb (that is, Anc. verbal
noun). A vast number of verbal nouns in My. have
the article as ha, Mg. ha, Ef . na ; but the article has,
of course, the other forms in many cases. The Oc.
verbal nouns are either adjective or substantive, and
express the same ideas, quality, agent, action, time,
place, instrument of the action, &c., as the Anc. Se.
verbal nouns.
Formative Suffixed Particles of the Verbal
Noun (Substantive and Adjective).
a. A verbal adjective is formed in Mg. by the
endings na, i, or ina, in Fiji by i, Sam. ia or a, and
na, ina. These are adjective endings, and suffixed to
nouns form adjectives, thus Sam. eleele dirt, deelea
dirty, Tong. mafanna heat, mafannaia hot, gele mud,
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
FORMATIVE SUFFIXED PARTICLES. 91
ea muddy, Mg. olitra a worm, ol&nna wormy,
worm-eaten, aomotra beard, somorina bearded, ozatra
a muscle, ozatincc muscular, Duke of York ruma
house, rumaina full of houses. In Ef. na suffixed to
adjectives slightly intensifies the meaning as pUa,
pUana big, or bipUa, bipilana, bipilena or bipilinay
barbaruta, barbarutena fat. In the Anc. languages
we find both these adjective endings attached both to
adjectives (participles) forming new adjectives, and to
nouns forming (denominative) adjectives, thus in Eth.
i (aiviy ai), Arm. an, ana, na, Mod. Syr. toz dust,
tozana dusty, ahena peace, shenxia peaceful, Arb. anu,
an\ i, iy' (both combined), ani, Heb. an, on, i, ay^
Both of these formative suffixes are phonetically
varied, and varied also as to use, in difierent dialects,
but either simply intensify an adjective, or turn a noun
into an adjective, as the use in a given dialect may be.
Both are of pronominal origin, as Dillman has rightly
pointed out, the i being etymologically connected with
the Se. i, third personal pronoun and demonstrative.
It "sounded originally iya or ay a (= der, welcher),"
Dillmann, sec. 117. As this particle played a large part
in the Anc. Se., and plays a large part in the Mod,
also, or Oc, I here quote Dillmann further, and beg
particular attention to his words with reference to
what follows : — " Auch im Semetischen gibt es ein von
jenem i (that is, the demonstrative or third person
pronoun), abgeleitetes relativ ia, dessen spuren sich
im Bindevocal des Stat. Const, und in der Adjectiven-
dung i Eth. noch erhalten haben,'' sec. 65. As to the
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
92 OCEANIA.
adjective ending an, and its pronominal origin, see
Dillmann, sec. 122. On these two Se. adjective endings,
see F. Muller, Grundrias, fee, iii. Band, ii. Abthei-
lung, pp. 332-3.
A vast number of adjectives (the so-called passive
verb or participle) are formed in Ma.-Ha. by suffixing
m, sometimes shortened to a, to the verb, 7ia, ina being
more rarely used, and in Mg. by suffixing i, iia, or ina
to the verb. That these words are really formed ad-
jectives, expressing, as in the Anc. Se., a permanent
inherent quality or intensity, is beyond doubt. In the
Tong. dialect, according to Marinor, it (ia, ea or a)
" frequently " forms adjectives from substantives, and
" verbs passive are not known in the Tong. language."
In Ma, " nouns will be met with occasionally carry-
ing the termination of a passive verb " (Williams) —
that is, they are denominative adjectives. Com-
pare Sam. mala calamity, nialaia unfortunate, to
be unfortunate. For Mg. ina (Tag., Formosa in), see
Gi^ndrias, p. 139 ; for Ma.-Ha. m, a. Id., p. 31. The
consonants prefixed, in the place cited, to ia do not
belong to this ending, as will be shown below. These
terminations also occur in the so-called ** passive "
imperative, Mg. i, o, Tag. an, Sam. ia, a. They occur
also with the numerals (adjective or ordinals) as in
Mota i, ei (ai), Eth. awi, ai, Heb. i, &c. So in
Amh. nga for na, Sam. nga, Eromanga ngi, Santo,
Whitsuntide, Ulawa, na, Mg. ny, Florida ni, Mar^,
Motlav, ns.
b. The Mod. abstract noun, infinitive or nomen
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
FORMATIVE SUFFIXED PARTICLES. 93
dctionis is formed by the abstract ending an, more
rarely na, in My. an, Mg. ana, Ef. an or ana (dia-
lectieally pronounced en, ena), Sam. anga, nga (or
anxi, na), Ha. an^, Nukuhiva, n, ng, k, identical with
the Anc. Se. abstract ending in Eth. an, na, Amh.
an, na, nga. This is a modification of the adjective
ending an, oia, as Dillmann has said. Not only as to
form, but also as to signification, the Oc. abstract noun
corresponds with the Eth. and Amh. abstracts referred
to, and generally the Anc. infinitives of the same
form, as the Arb. verbal nouns, having this same
ending an, Heb. on. They " express the action or
staie, together with certain closely related ideas (such
as the place of the action)," and " are used both in an
active and a passive sense." So in Oc. they may be
active and passive, and denote not only in all the
dialects the action or state, but various related ideas,
as the place, means, or time of the action. Thus Mg.
fiadananxx, slowness (miadana), fiadiana weapons
(miady), fanoratana the means of writing, writing
desk, pens, &c. (manoratiu).
In Mg. and Ef., from every verb and every verb
stem a nomen actionis may be formed by this ending ;
it is also very largely used in My., and not so largely
in Sam. For this ending in other Oc. dialects, see F.
Muller, Omndriss, p. 112 ; for the same in Arb. and
other Anc. dialects, Id.iii. Band, ii. Abtheilung, p. 332.
This n was sometimes changed to m in Eth. and
Amh., so Motu (New Guinea) in matama beginning
(Sam. amatanga), Mota {v for m) muleva a going
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
94 OCEANIA.
(mule to go), togava a staying, station (toga to abide)
Fagani ma*eva death {ma*e = mate, die). In Amh. this
m (for n) is, like n, also an adjective ending. So Ef.
/au, dialect faum, new, Mg. voovoo, My. bharu.
This verbal noun ending has become entirely pre-
dominant in modem (Oc.) use, the other ending that
prevailed so largely in Anc. Se., namely t, originally
the Se. feminine ending, occurring for obvious reasons
" fossilized," as below.
0. In the Anc. languages some verbs, treated as
ground-forms, are known to be what may be called
secondary ground-forms — i.e, they are verbal nouns or
derived stems in which the formative additions have
become fossilized. This is, of course, the case with a
very large number of verbs in Oc. And the Anc. or
Intermediate period verbal noun endings thus found
attached to these Oc. words form a most conspicuous
and pervading feature of these languages. The two
Anc. endings were the two (n and t) above noticed.
1 (n,) Eth. aUy na, Arb. an, Heb. on, an, Arm. ono,
ana. Phonetic modifications are Heb. o for on, Eth.
am (for an), frequent in Amh., and ma (for na), along
with an and na and nga (for na). It occurs in Mg.
as na, and ma and nga, the ma becoming also av, v, f;
in My. as w, an, ng, and m, the latter also becoming
p ; in Ef. as n, en, na, ng, m, f; and in Sam. as na, nga,
mo, and /a. Thus in the verb " to drink," Mg. minona,
the ending is changed to ma in the verbal substantive
finomana,, and verbal adjective ampinomina: so in
velona to be alive, live, the ending na is changed to ma
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
FORMATIVE SUFFIXED PARTICLES. 95
in the Mod. imperative vdoma, substantive amelomana,
adjective velomina. The first of these words occurs in
My. as minum, Ef. minug {minung) (n to ng) and
Tiiinu (n elided), and in Sam. as inu, in which the n
is elided, but appears as m in the verbal substantive
inumanga, arid adjective inumia. See above, a and
by for these endings of the Mod. verbal substantive,
and verbal adjective. The second word (vdona) occurs
in My. as idup, Java urip (m to p), in Ef. as Tnauri
(dialects mairi, vwle), Tanna murif (m to /), Mar^
wamma, Sam. ola, A word may occur in its Mod.
ground-form in one dialect with, in another without,
this ending, as My. hanina food, eating, My. makan,
Ef . kani, Sam. *ai (for kani), Mod. verbal noun,
My. makaTian, Fa. kanien, Sam. 'aina, and 'aiga (g =2
Tig) food, eating; the latter corresponds in meaning
with the Mg. hanina, A word may occur in a Mod.
as in an Anc. dialect in one form with, in another
without, this ending, or in one form with this, in
another with the other ending now to be described.
2 (t). The Se. feminine ending t, th, Heb. th, often
modified to h (silent), ah for ath, Arb. t modified to h
(distinctly aspirated and guttural), Mod. Arb. t modi-
fied to h (silent as in Heb.), and by many Arabs to ts,
Syr. thy t (in the common infinitive elided, u for uth),
Amh. t (at, et, it, ta, and ia or ya, for iat), Eth. t (it,
ia for iat, et, ot, at). To be noted is the adjective
ending i, iy\ then to this suffixed this abstract ending
t, so Arb. iyat, Eth. % at, et, ot:, ut are formed, and
Heb. and Arm. ut.
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
96 OCEANIA.
This ending occurs in Mg. as t, and modified to tr
(dialect <«), r, s, and z, also k and h ; in My. as ty and
modified to r, ^', or gr, and 8 ; in Ef. t, /c, and modified
to r, and s ; and in Sam. as t, and modified to i, also to
* (k), 8. In Ef . also o or u for ot or ut occurs, the t being
elided. Thus, to take the common Oc. verbs, hear, see,
die, fear, the first is in Mg. reny (sometimes, by elision
of the 7?, re)y and the ending appears as s in the im-
peratives 7riandrene8a, andrameso, reneso, and verbal
substantive a7idrene8ana ; in My. r in dangar, verbal
substantive dangaran ; in Ef. 8 in rogosa ki nia ; and
in Sara, s in logosa 'iina ; and in Fiji th in rogotha
(g = ng). This word also occurs in Ef. and Fiji as
rogo (t elided); Sam. logo, and with the ending in 1,
logona. In the second word, " see," it occurs in Mg.
as tr and t in hiratra (hi article) sight, vision, and verbal
substantive ihiratana ; in My. as t in Hat, verbal
substantive kaliatan ; in Fiji as th in raitha; and as o
(for ot) and k in Ef. leo, dialect lek. In the third
word, " die,'* it occurs in Mg. as 8 in the verbal sub-
stantives hafate8ana (maty) ; in Mang. as r in the
verbal substantive mate ranga, being absent (elided)
in My., Fa., and Sam. mati (i for it). In the fourth
word, " fear," Mg. tahotra, My. takut, Ef. mataku,
Sam. niaia'u, it occurs in Mg. as tr and r in
matahotra, verbal substantive atahorana; in My.
as ^ in takuty verbal substantive katakutan ; in
Ef. as u (for ut) in mataku, verbal subatantive
mataknan (for Tnatakutan) ; and in Sam. as w
(for ut) in mata'u, the t reappearing in the verbal
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
FORMATIVE SUFFIXED PARTICLES. 97
adjective mata'utia. In the word "adhere," Mg.
raikitra, reJcetra, My. rakat, lakat, Ef. liko, or liku,
it occurs in Mg. as tr and t in miraikitra, and verbal
substantive iraiketana, as t in My. Zato or lekat;
as u and u^ in liku, likut, or o, ot in Zifo>, iiA;o^. The t,
in this Ef. word (liko, liku), reappears when a pronoun
in the accusative is suffixed to it, as likutia (him, it),
likutik (thee), as the Heb. ah becomes ath in the con-
struct state, and in Syr. ^6, uth. It appears as r in
My. tidor, g in Tag. tulug, u for ut in Ef . matnm, to
sleep. In another form of the same word " adhere "
likoy Mg. rohy (Ef. na liko or luko) a rope, cord, it
appears in Mg. as z in the verbal substantive rohizana
tied (i.6., roped). For another example, see word
" weeping " below.
3. The foregoing formative suffixes are found
regularly combined in Oceanic, thus : the adjective
terminations in a are suffixed to the verbal noun end-
ings in c, 1, 2, to form the Mod. verbal adjective
(participle), and the verbal substantive terminations
in h are suffixed to the verbal noun endings in c, 1,
2, forming the Mod. verbal substantive, or noTnen
actionis (infinitive). For the former we have thus in
Mg. tinay rina, hina (for kina), sina, zina, nina,
mina, vina, fina ; Ma. kia, Sam. *m, tia, lia, sia, nia,
ngia, mia, Jia ; and for the latter Mg. taria, rana,
hana, sana, rana, nana, mana, vana, fana; Sam.
tanga, 'anga, langa ; Ma; ranga, anga; Karat.
nanga, Sam. manga, fanga; My. tan, ran, san, gan,
nan, man, pan ; Ef. tien, rien, sien, kien, an, nien,
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
98 OCEANIA.
mien, fien. In Ef. this en (in one dialect) is for an,
or ana (as it is in another dialect). It would only
uselessly take up space to give further examples here
of words with these compound terminations, or rather
combinations of the Se. verbal noun endings, of which
the first part is Anc. and fossilized, the second living.
They pervade the Oc.
Suffixed Particles Connecting or Appearing to
Connect the Verb with its Object.
These are not found in Mg., the ordinary pre-
positions being used when required not suflSxed
to the verb. They are found in My., Ef., and Sam.,
and are in reality only two or three. My. kan.
Fa. ki, Fiji fca, Sam. 'i («.€., ki) ; and My. i, Ef. i,
Sam. i. As Dr. F. MuUer (Lc.) has said. My. kan
is " identisch mit der Praposition Mai. akan, Batt. hon
* zu, nach.' " SutBxed to verbs in My. it gives them a
transitive, often a causative, sense ; in Ef. ki is the same
preposition, and Sam. % Ma. ki is the same (see above).
This preposition, from coming immediately after the
verb and connecting it with the object, has in some
dialects (not in all — not, e.g., in Mg.) come often to be
written suffixed to the verb ; but in no dialect is it
alwaya so suffixed. In reality its use is exactly that
of the Anc. preposition (with which it is identical, see
above), connecting the verb with its object.* It is
simply a transitive preposition. In Ef. also, it should
• Wr, Art. Or. ii., sees. 21, 27-:
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
SUFFIXED PABTICLES. 99
be said, the verb used with it has sometimes a causa-
tive sense, so in Fiji. The investigation of this matter
has been mixed up with another — that of the verbal
noun {substantive and adjective) endings. Thus the
supposed two-syllabled transitive endings are simply
this preposition suffixed to the verbal noun endings
above mentioned, giving in Ef. raM, aki, saki, naki,
maki, fa'i ; in Sam. ta'i, la% 8a% a%wi\ ma% fa'i ; in
My. tkariy rkan, skan, nkan, mkan, pkan ; Fiji taka,
thaka, raka, laka, kaka, yaka, aka, maka, vaka, waka.
In every case the syllable preceding the preposition
ka, kiy kan is not a preposition or part of one, but one
or other of the verbal noun endings above discussed.*
The other so-called " transitive endings " are not, as
hardly need be said, except in one case (that of i), such
at all, but simply the above verbal noun endings with-
out the suffixed ka, ki, kan. Of these, of course, the
adjective endings sometimes form denominative verbs
(or adjectives), and sometimes give somewhat of in-
tensity to a verb or adjective to which they are
attached. The ending i in My. certainly does appear
(that is, it forms a transitive verb) to connect the verb
(or verbal noun) with its object. It does so also
sometimes in Ef., but rarely in Sam., and not at all in
Mg. It is also seen in Ef . in the termination of almost
every Mod. verbal substantive mieny tien, &c., and in
Mg. in that of almost every verbal noun (adjective)
mina, Una, &c., Sam. mia, tia, &c. It is suffixed to Abe
* See Codrington*s " Syllabic Verbal Suffixes," p. 180 of his work,
for the hopeless confusion that arises from not perceiying this.
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
100 OCEANIA.
old verbal noun ending thus, in Ef . (transitive) ii, ri,
«, ni, ngi, mi, ft, My. (transitive) ti, ri, «, ni, mi, pi, ngi,
Sam. (transitive) ti. When the Mod. verbal substan-
tive in Ef . is formed from the verb by suffixing an
en) this i is retained as tangiai to bewail (or a bewail-
ing of, or with respect to), My. tangisi (from tangis) ;
but in My. it is not retained in the Mod. verbal noun
formed by an, thus Ef. tangisian, My. tangisan, Ef.
iangi is neuter " to wail," for tangis, literally " a wail-
ing" (My. tangis), and when the particle i is to be suf-
fixed the s (for t) reappears in tangisi ; compare the
similar remark above pointing out how this ending
was in the Anc. dialects similarly elided and made to
reappear before a suffix. In Mg. i appears as a pure
adjective ending. In Ma.-Ha. it sometimes appears
as in the above Ef. manner, thus Ef. (bulu, bulut)
huluti (transitive), Sam. puluti ; in Ma.-Ha., when a
pure adjective ending, it is always followed by a, as
pulutia, Ef. Mni, Ma. kini to pinch, verb adjective Ma.
Hnitia; Ef. kiniti (transitive), Ha. 'initi (i,e., kiniti).
Of course both kan, ki, and i are found suffixed to
verbs also that are without the verbal noun endings.
In Fiji this i appears unchanged both as the adjective
ending and when the verb is followed by an object,
in the one case appearing to be a " passive " ending, in
the other a transitive particle. That the Oc. verbal
adjectives are not real " passives " is further manifest
from the fact that in Sam., e.g,, they have " an active
signification when the pronoun precedes " (Pratt), and
are transitive. Thus i, even when apparently a
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
SUFFIXED PABTICLES. 101
transitive particle, may be simply the adjective ending,
though it certainly suggests comparison both as to
origin, form, and grammatical use with the Anc. i
(etymologically identical with adjective ending i) of
the Se. construct state. Undoubtedly the adjective
ending i in Oc. verbifies a substantive (i.€., forms a
denominative adjective or verb), and increases the
verbal power of or intensifies a verb or adjective
(participle) ; and the same may be said of the other
adjective ending *n', of which, as -an, -ang, Muller says
that in Makassar and Dayak it "has generally the
same force as i," while in Battak " it forms intransi-
tive verbs," exactly as also does i in the cases pointed
out. In Fiji this na forms verbs (transitive) from
nouns, and is described as a transitive termination,
though in fact it is simply the adjective ending.
As the Oc. verb is originally a verbal noun, its
object may be considered as the genitive of the object,
and the verb or verbal noun as governing it in the
construct state : therefore, the above i is used in the
manner described, to all appearance (though it is really
the adj. ending), as it was in the Anc. languages^ as the
Note. — If the My. i is, as is most probable, tlie same i as is
seen in the terminations of the Mg., Sam., and Ef., it is the
adjective ending sometimes apparently a transitive termina-
tion in Sam. and Ef., always so in My. If it is simply a
transitive preposition it is the same as Ef . ki, Sam. H suffixed,
Maori i not suffixed, Mg. a' not suffixed. As to the pho-
netic variations of the Anc. termination t, th, in Oc, it is quite
certain that it is sometimes changed to /, v (which must be in
My. p)y as is elsewhere shown.
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
102 OCEANIA.
mark of the genitive or construct state; thus, My.
(liat) liati orang " see a man," literally " seeing (of) a
man," and so with the prep, liatkan orang, " seeing
(of) a man," or " looking at (or to) a man." When
two nouns come together in My. the first governs the
second in the genitive of the construct state, as tanak
JavMy the land of Java. In the other Oc. dialects,
Mg., Ef., and Sam.^ generally a genitive preposition is
used, though the construct state is found in all. In
Ef. the above would be tano ni Jawa, or tano ngi
Jawa, or tano hi Jawa, ni, or ngi, and hi, all forms of
the same prep., and hi. My. ha{n). In the Anc. lan-
guages, as in the Mod., both constructions are used.
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
CHAPTER X.
Nouns, Adjectives, and Verbs.
Having considered the pronominal words and the
formative and syntactical particles, we now proceed to
the other and larger part of the material of the Se.-Oc.
languages — the great mass of the stem- words. In Mg.
faly {fall) is an adjective signifying "pleased," "glad"
(Arb. farih, pleased, glad, v. adj. of Jariha i. he was
glad), mifaly 3 (the numbers denote the verb forms
above), ifaliana enidJifaliaTiay, subst. of 3, hafaliana
V. subst. of faly with article as ha,falifalina v. adj.
of faly reduplicated, mampifaly 5, arriYjifaliana v.
subst. of 5, ampifalina v. adj. of 5, fahafaliana v.
subst. of 1 (article as ha), mamalifaly 1 (for manfa-
lifaly, article as 7i), aTnalifaliana v. subst. of 1 {see
Mg. Dictionary) The Arb. verb has three forms —
i., ii., and iv. In this case the primitive Oc. word is
an Anc. verbal adjective (participle). The following
is an Anc. verbal substantive (infinitive): — Mg. ara-
hdba a salutation (Arb. marhaba word used as a
salutation or in bidding welcome, verb rahuba or
rahiba i.), miarahaba 3, Jiarahaba, fiarahabana v.
subst. of 3, arahabaina adj. of arahaba p. (primitive).
These two words may show that the Oc. primitives
or ground-forms are Anc. verbal nouns (substantive or
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
104 OCEANIA.
adjective). Sometimes they are verbal nouns of the
intermediate period, as Mg. haniifia (see below) eating,
and perhaps Mg. aina (with same v. n. ending no)
life (Heb. hayah to live, be prosperous, originally " to
breathe," v. n. hay living, life, Arb. hay living,
hayawan life), miaina 3, to live, be prosperous, ^airia
V. subst. of 3, " mode of living, breathing," mpiaina
n. adj. of 3, liver, one living, fiainana v. subst. of 3,
mampiaina 5, to cause to live, fampiainana v. subst.
of 5, Tniainaina 3, with primitive reduplicated, "to
breatlie feebly." The causative of the Anc. verb is used
in Arb. and Heb.
1. Death, die, dead. Mg. maiy dead, faty dead
body, Ja. pati death (Arb. ma'tat) dead. My. mati, Ef .
mate, Sam. mate dead. My. and Ma. mati death, dead,
Sam. oti (Chaldee mx)t) death, Ef. d. mate dead, place
of the dead, the grave (Heb. mouth, moth) ; Arb. TYiata,
Heb. mef, Eth. mM, Syr. Tnit, he died. The Mg. m/ity
or faty. My. and Ma. mxiti, compares with the Arb.
n. a. {nomen actionis) Tna'tat, matet (Eth. motat),
matets, Tnateh, or matih (for the final t was sometimes
pronounced in Arb. ts, gutteral h and silent h, and in
Heb. th and silent h) ; in Oc, in the forms of this word
about to be given, it is either silent or pronounced as 8
or r — Mg. mahafaty. My. mamatikan, Ma. whakamate,
Sam. taTYiate, Fiji vaJcamatea, all 1, Mg. fahafatesana
n. a. of 3 (s the Anc. v. n. ending), Mg. hafateaaTia,
My. kamatian, Ef . namatiana, v. subst. of p. with the
article as ha, ha, and na, Ef. matiana, Mangareva
materanga (r the Anc. v. n. ending in Mg. s) v. subst.
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
NOUNS, ADJECTIVES, AND VERBS. 105
of p. without article, death, act of dying; another
abstract ending is seen in Mangareva matenga death,
Ef. Tnatingo place of the dead — the grave. The causa-
tive of the Anc. verb was used, as the Oc. 1, in Arb.,
Heb., Eth., and Syr., and with the same signification.
2. Life, living. Mota esu, Ja. urip, Sam. ola, Ef.
mauri (dd. mole, maim) Lif u mely Fi. 6uZa, Mg. velona
(and veloina)y Arb. {'asha i. he lived) n. a. 'a's/i, *ishat,
Tna'ash, ma'ish, Tna'ishat Mg. velona p. living,
"mivdona 3, velomina adj. of p., TnaTndona 1,
Tnpamdona n. ag. of 1, fahavelomana n. a. of 1, My.
idup (ending p, Mg. m, ti), idupan n. a., kaidupan
n. a., with article as ka, maTigidupkhn, or i, 1, Ef.
Tnauri, n. a. mauriana, nsimauriana (article as na),
bakamauri 1, bakamauriana, nafakamaiiriana n. a.,
Mota vaesu 1, Fiji vakabula 1, Sam. ola p., olanga
n. a. lifetime, so ola'anga (*Arb. i), and olatanga means
of living, faaola 1, v., and n. ag. faaolangayfaa^latanga
n. a. The causative and reflexive of the verb are used
in Arb. and Mg. As we have the "unconscious
article" and "double article," so we have the "un-
conscious " and " double " verbal noun endings in Oc.
3. Seeing. Mg. hiratra (hi the article). My. liat,
Ef. leo, lo, le, lek, Fi. rai, Sam. ilo, iloa, Arb. raai i.,
n. a. raat, raxii, royat, rayat, royan, Heb. raah i., n. a.
reoh, reot ; Eth. reyat The Anc. verb signifies to see,
know, think. Mg. hiratra sight, vision, maJiiratra 1,
"mihiratra 3. My liat p. to see, liatkan, liati, kalia-
tan V. n. of p., with article, maliat 1, pangliat v. n. of
1 (with article as ng\ pangliatan v. n. of 1. Ef. leo,
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
106 OCEANIA.
le, lo, lek (k for t) to see, with preposition (unconscious)
libi, lekba (Heb. raah be), leoan, loon, lekan, lekban,
and with article naleoan, &c., n. a., lolo, Ide, redupli-
cated look for (look much or often), Idnga adj. ending
(unconscious), bildnga 3, look for, langan, bilangan,
or nalangan, &c., n. a. Fiji rai seeing, to look, be
seen, raitha (always followed by object — that is, con-
struct state), vakaraitaka, vakarairaitaka l,ka as in
My. liatkan, transitive preposition, cause to appear,
show. Sam. ilo, iloUo, ilonga, faailonga, v. n. of
faailo, and used also as a verb, faailongaina v. adj.
In the Anc. the causative and reflexive used. Com-
pare here also Mg. ray, My. dai, Ja. rai. Ma. rae, To.
lue, Heb. rai, Eth. rey forehead, appearance, aspect,
sight. The Anc. abstract ending t is plainly seen in
Mg., My., and Fiji.
4. Fearing, being feared. Mg. tahotra, My. taJcut,
Ef. mataku or mitahw, Sam. mata'u, Arb. (taka* 1,
he feared, a secondary radical from wak<i viii.)
takiyyat a fearing, or being afraid. Mg. tahotra fear.
My. takut fearing, to fear, fear ; Mg. matahotra 3,
My. bartakut 3, Ef. matakib 3, Sam. mata'u 3, to fear,
be afraid, fearing ; Mg. ToakataJioPra, My. manakut,
Ef. bakamataku, Sam. faamata'u, all 1, to frighten ;
verbal substantives Mg. fahatahorana (t or tr to r).
My. takutan, and with article katakutan, Ef.
matakuan, Tnatakua, and naraatakvAin, namatakua,
fakamatakuan, and with article nafakaniatakuan,
Sam., adjective, mata'utia. In this word the primi-
tive or ground-form in Ef . and Sam. is form 3 — that is.
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
NOUNS, ADJECTIVES, AND VERBS. 107
the ground-form is not used. So with many stems in
the Ane. languages and Mod.
5. Digging. Arb. {kara' i., Heb. karahy Eth. karaya,
he dug), n. a. karw a digging or being dug, Mg. hady
ditch, My. gali, Ef . kili, Sam. 'eli, to dig ; Mg. voahady
dug, mihady 3, to dig, hadina adj. being dug,
fikadiana v. subst. of 3, mpiady n. ag. of 3, a digger,
fangady v. n. of 1, a digging instrument, the native
spade. My. panggali : My. manggali 1 ; My. gali to dig,
Ef. kili (Sam. 'eli). My. galiaUy Ef. kilian and (with
article) nakilian, act of digging, the digging, Ef. kdK
native spade. Reduplicated Mg. mihadihady 3, mana-
dihady (for Tnanhadihady, article as n, cf, Ef.) 1, Ef.
kilikili, kilikilian, n. a., Mg. hadihadina, adjective,
being (Jug. Ef, kdH compares with the Arb. n. ag. of
form i. kdri.
6. Hearing, a being heard. Heb. shama*, and
shame'a, Eth. dham'a, Arb. sami'a, n. a. aama'at, Heb.
sheTnuah, Mg. rea, re a being heard, mandreny 1
(Erom. mantrengi), andrenesana n. a. of 1 (the Anc.
abstract ending as s, Arb. t) ; My. dangar to hear
(Anc. abstract ending as r), kadangaran n. a. with
article as ka, mandangar or manangar 1 (article as n),
pandangar v. n., sense of hearing ; Ef . rongo, rongi
to hear, rongoan, narongoan (article as ti) a hearing,
the hearing, or the thing heard, report (so Anc.
languages), rongosaki listen to (preposition H, Anc.
li, and abstract ending as s, as in Mg.), reduplicated
rongorongo ki to proclaim (so Anc), rongorongoan
proclamation, narongorongoan uia the good proclama-
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
108 OCEANIA.
tion or report, the Gospel, Fiji rongo to hear, be
heard, sound, rongotha (abst. ending th and t, as in
Anc.) to hear, transitive (that is, construct state),
(My. clangar), vakarongothxi 1, rongotaka, Ef. rongo-
saki, Sam. longolongosa'i, Fiji rongorongotaka ; Sam,
longo, to hear, feel, report, a report, sound, longoina
adj., reported, longolongod adj. renowned, longoTva to
hear {na adj. ending), faalongo 1. Mg. re, rea, in
which the n is elided, as in Tah. roo. The causative
used in the Anc. languages also.
7. Eating. Heb. akal, Ch. dkal, Arb. akala i., to
eat, devour, n.a. makal, akal, Mg. hanina (adj. ending
na, cf. velona, aina, above), food, being eaten. My.
makan, Mg. fahana, Ef. kani (Fiji, kana, v. adj.
ia'Mi), Sam. 'ai to eat (ti elided), v. adj. 'airui, Mg.
mihinana 3, to eat, fikinana v. n. eatable, mpihinana
n. ag. eater ; Ef . iamana, Sam. 'ainga, My. maAja-jm^i
act of eating, food: causative Mg. mamahana, My.
mamakan, Ef. ftangram, Fiji vakania; Ef. bafavga
(caus. particle reduplicated), Sam. fafanga, to feed,
cause to eat; Mg. faJianana, My. makanan, Mg.
amahanana, Ef. banganiana. It is remarkable that
the causative is used in Mg. and Ef. also for to charge
(i.e,, feed) a musket. After being separated thousands
of years muskets (a comparatively recent invention)
came to Madagascar and the New Hebrides, and, such
was the identity of language, thought, and race, the
same Anc. Se. word was equally applied by the Mala-
gasy and Efatese to this new use. The Anc languages
also used the causative " to feed," " cause to eat." In
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
NOUNS, ADJECTIVES, AND VERBS. 109
this word we see that in the Oc. or Mod. may-
be found more than one Anc. verbal noun of a
particular verb.
8. Drinking, drink. Heb. (shathah i. to drink), (Ch.
shtha, ishtha)^ n. a. mishteh, sMthi (akthi), shiku, Arb.
siki, drink, act of drinking; Lifu idhi (ith), New
Caledonia undu^ Mah. heru, Ulawa iluhi, Anudha
ilu, Mg. minona {na adj. ending as above, velona,
dlna, hanitia). My. minum (end. n to m), Ef. minung,
TninUy dd. Tnini, mining, munuma ; Fiji ngunuva
(m to v) ngunu, d. unu7)ia ; Sam. inu (the ending m
appears in adj. inumia, and v. subst. inumanga). Mg.
finomana (for finonana, n to m), My. minuman, Ef.
minungiana, Sam. inumanga, v. subst. : causative
("give to drink," as in Heb. and Arb. — note change
of th to k in this word in Heb., Arb., and Eth.) Mg.
n. ag. mpampinona giver to drink, one who causes to
drink (farnpinomana v. subst., ampinomina v. adj.).
My paminum a drinker; Fiji vangunuva, "to give
drink to, or cause to drink." The change of s or < to
n is common; compare My., Ef., and Sam. stisu,
Mg. nono to suck, breasts (teats), milk, and see
below the numeral " six," and the word for " palm "
(cocoanut).
9. Doing, acting. Heb. pa'al, Arb. fa'ala, 1, to do,
make, act, n. a. Heb. po'dl (po'l), Arb., fa'alat, Ef.
bolo,folo, Fiji vala. Ef. bolo/olo, Fiji valavala, to make
or do, Ef. nafolofolon action, deed, mode of action,
conduct. The abst. ending (Arb. i) appears in Fiji
transitive (construct state) valata to make or do, Ef .
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
110 OCEANIA.
bolus to do (a person, in a hostile sense). In E£, in
one dialect, holo also means " to act deceitfully;" com-
pare Arb. viii., " finxit mendacium contra aUquenC*
10. Working, work, making. Heb. ('owaA 1, to work,
make) n. a. ma'dseht participle 'oseh, Mg. asa, Java
yasa, Ef. uisi, wisi, d. piai, Sam. 08i to work, make.
Mg. asa work, labour, miasa 3 to work,^8a mode of
working, implements, usual time or season for working,
asaina adj. wrought, Sam. osia, Ef. nauisian work,
thing made.
11. Creating, producing, creation, production. Heb.
bara (create, produce, beget), Arb. bara (create, n. a.
bur\ bum'), bariya (to be clear, pure, innocent of,
n. a. bara, bum, barat) n. a. bariyat, Heb. beriah,
creation, thing made or created, Heb. 6ar, a son, offspring.
Mg. forona {na adj. ending, as in velona, hanina,
&c.), " formed, created, fashioned, produced, arranged,"
mamorona 1, to form, create, produce, Ef. bora, and
wora to be produced, to spring up, to be born (in Heb.
and Arm. the reflexive is " to be bom"), wora offspring,
Mg. fara, offspring, children, progeny, heir (Heb. and
Arm. bar), Ef. bakawora 1 (Mg. mamorona) to cause
to spring up, create, produce. Heb. bari, Ef. baru,
barua fat, fattened. Arb. bariy, &c., pure, clear, free
from, innocent, Ef. baru, barua.
Perhaps My. buwat (Heb. beriah, Arb. bariyat) be-
longs here (r, as often, elided), to do, make, construct,
fabricate, buwatan abst. n., mambuwat 1 (Mg.
mamorona), n. ag. pambuwat, and parbuwat (note the
article both as m for n, and as r in this word).
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
NOUNS, ADJECTIVES, AND VERBS. Ill
parbuwatan, and pamhuwatan, abst. n. In Ef ., in one
dialect, we have meri or mari, in another hati, in
another hringi ot fringi to do, to make.
12. Adhere. Mg. raikitra, rekitra, rohy a rope,
rohizana bound, fettered ; My. lakat, rakat and lakap
(for lakat), (transposed) kalat, halat a rope ; Ef . liko,
luko, Ukati, lukoti, My. lakatkan, malakat 1, barlakat
3, Mg. miraikitra 3, mandraikitra 1, raiketana (adj.)
Arb. 'alika 1, verbal nouns, *lafcat a cord, 'ala&at,
'alikat. The Arb. uses i., iv., v., and viii. In Ef. the
ending t is not used except when the i is suffixed, and
then is always transitive.
13. Bad, ill. Arb. sd 1, to behave or be bad, to be
ill, n. a. 8a\ sawat, &c., Mg. ratsi/, Baju rahat, My.
jahat, Fiji tha, Ef. sa bad ; Ef. tctsan (adj.) to be ill,
Mg. marary 3 (but appears as an independent word),
mankarary 1 (double article).
Ef. masaki might seem the same (sa with prepo-
sition ki), Sam. ma% but My. sakit proves that it is
not, and that masaki is like My. barsakit 3, and for
masakit : sakit being the same as Arb. sakawat conditio
mala, status malus, miseria, n. a. of sakia 1, to be in
misery.
These few examples show the actual use of the
formative particles in the Mod. dialects, and how these
particles both undergo and cause phonetic changes,
and how the particles affixed in the Anc. and inter-
mediate periods have (like the article, and sometimes
the suffixed transitive particle or preposition) become
"unconscious," or as if they were radical parts of the
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
112 OCEANIA.
word. They show how every letter and syllable may
be accounted for in the vast majority of cases. And
they show how vain it is in comparing the Oc. lan-
guages with the Anc, or with others, to simply place
the compared words in juxtaposition, as has too often
been done, taking no account of grammatical structure.
This would be very well if the Oc. words were "roots,"
as are the Chinese, but as there are no roots, but only
formed words, in the Oc, it is a method childishly
inapt. It has seemed best to give the above few
examples immediately after the discussion of the par-
ticles. It clearly appears, then, that an Oc. stem-word
is a formed word, and that it often bears legibly upon
it the mark, which the wear and tear of thousands of
years have not effaced, of the Anc. Se. inflection by
externally added particles, or internal vowel changes,
or both.
The passive is sometimes expressed, as in the Anc.
languages, by the reflexive form, and sometimes the
Oc. primitive is an Anc. passive participle. When the
Oc. primitive is an Anc. infinitive (as it is very often),
like it it is either active or passive, as used. Thus
in My. the article Qcd) alone prefixed to such an infi-
nitive often, not forms, but points it out as used in its
passive sense, and so with the preposition di (compare
F. Muller on this latter). The Mod. verbal substan-
tive also is active and passive, as used, but prevailingly
used in the passive sense. The Mod. verbal adjective
also is prevailingly used in the passive sense, but often
in the active. The usage varies in different dialects.
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
s
^ 3*
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
CHAPTER XI.
The Numerals.
One. The Mg. isa, My. asa, sa, compares with New
Guinea oaaay Savu aisa, Timor eiduy Sumatra do, Epi
ta, Marata eta, Assy, ahadu, edu, Mod-Syr. ha, hda,
Eth. ahadu, Tigre ade, Arb. ahad\ wahid' ; and the
Mg. iray {irais', iraika) with Sam. tad, Paama tas,
tai (and rais), Epi. saka (and raka), Ef. siki, and sikei
(and teaa). Mg. iray or rai^ (for irais') is isa with
the article, as r (c/. ra-yio, ^'a^/, reny, above), and in
iraika the original d {t, s) of the numeral is changed
to k. In Sam. this article appears as t\ in Epi and
Paama as r, t, and s, and in Ef. as t and s. The same
article appears in the first consonant of Tanna (dialects)
liti, riti, kv:ati, kadi; "New Guinea dik, tika; New
Caledonia (dd.) tat, tedja, tchika. This article appears
as r also in My. barsa, Mg. miray, form 3, to be one,
oned, united, and the elided s reappears, under the in-
fluence of the ending, in the verbal nouns iraiaana,
ampiraisina (mampiray, form 5, to cause to be
one, to unite, tafaray, form 4, made one, made itself,
or themselves, one). Ef., form 3, masiki, or miaiki (My.
barsa, Mg. mirat) to be one, alone (by himself) ;
as to this r in Mg. being 8 in Ef. another example
is seen above in the word Mg. firy, My. barapa,
Ef. bUa, JUa," how meLuy V In the Anc. languages
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
116 OCEANIA.
(Arb.) the refleanve, the causative, and the reflexive-
cauBotive forms were used also. The caus. in the
Mod, languages is in Mg. /atiaraika, Ef. bakasikei,
Sam. faatasi.
This numeral has in Ef . also the form sera (for siki)
one only, each one, every, Sumatra soda, sara, 1. In
Ef. as in Arb, siki takes the suffixed pronouns, and
with the same signification as sikina or sikinia he alone,
sikimu you alone.
Two. Arb. ithna (the a is the dual ending) for thina
(Heb. sMna\ shine, Arm. tira\ tire) Mod. Arb. itna,
Una, Mod. Syr. iP,ra\ tire, Arb. (f .) thinta, Mg. roa (w
elided as often), My. dua, Celebes dia, Ef. rua, Sam.
Zua (the a is the Ane. dual ending, compare the pro-
nouns above), Mangarai sua, Epi tshua. In Ef. this
word is often pronounced trua, and is sometimes
shortened to rd or re, and sometimes pronounced tua.
The termination ia (in thinta, Heb. sAiV^, Himy. ^cr^6
or tita) appears as k in Mg. d. rica, Florida ruka, and
as V (see above) in Tag. daluva, dalava, dalova {da
article).
Three. Heb. shalosh, Arb. thaldth, Syr. toU (tholth),
Ch. tildth, Mod. Syr. t^ld, Mg. ^eZo, My. ri^a (Z or r to
g), Ef. and Sam. tolu, Java ^aZw, Atshin rfw, Epi selu,
tolu, tou, Ambrym suC, si, Mallicolo tolu, ndila, tir, roi,
ret, Aneityum eseij, eseik.
Four. Arb. drha'at, Heb. iXrba'ah, drba'ath, Mod.
Syr. arbd\ Mg. efatra {tra, Arb. t, see this termination
above). My. ampat (am for ar, as often, e.g., pam-
buwat, parbmuat, &c.), Ef . bat, or &aa/^, Sam. fa.
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
THE NUMERALS. 117
Five. Arb. khamd (Newman spells the Mod. Arb.
kam8\ Mg. dimy (k to t), My., Ef., and Sam. lima.
In one Ef. dialect, with the article this word
signifies " the hand," that is " the five fingers : " so
in Arb. with the same article it signifies " the
five fingers" cUkams (digit i, Freytag), Ef. nalimana
the five of him, his five fingers, Aneityum nikman and
nijman, his five fingers, that is, " his hand " (note the
change of k and^') ; the final n in nalimana, nikman is
the suffixed pronoun "his." The word "five" has
thus in many Oc. dialects become the word for " hand."
My. (article as ta) tangan, Mg. tanana, Fiji nalinga, is
the same as Ef. nalima, Sam. le lima, the five fingers,
the hand. See " hand" below. See also the word
" house " for similar phonetic changes in Oc. of Anc.
initial kh.
The causative of this word in Arb. signifies " to do
five times," so Ef . hakalima, Sam. faxiUma, and with all
the numerals this is the force of the Ef. and Sam.
causative.
Six. Mg. enina (dd. one, ene). My., Java Tianam
anam, Sam. ono, Fiji ono, Arb. sitf, Mod. Syr. ishta,
Himy. (with mimation) sadtam; as to the phonetic
changes between the Mod. and the Anc, compare the
similar changes in the word " to drink," above, Anc.
ahSthi, mishteh, Mod. inu, minn; and My. suau with
Mg. nono there cited.
Seven. Mg. fito, Ja. pitv,, Sam. fitu, Fiji vitn, Arb.
aab'ak (compare Eth. saWatn, Amh. sabat) ; if this is
correct, the final t is retained in the Mod. dialects, as
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
118 OCEANIA.
it is in the word four, Arb. arba'at' My. ampat, Mg.
efatra, Ef. bdti, the initial 8 being elided. My.
tujuh, perhaps, changes the b or v to t; or elides
the V or 5 after t (s), like Harar sate, Mg. (dd.)
sidda, titu, 7.
Eight. Mg. valo, Atshin lapan, My. (with article)
dalapan, Savu panu, Java wolu, Sam. valu,F jii walu,
Heb. sheTTioneliy Arb. thar)iania, Mod. Arb. tmdn, Syr.
<Ar>ion«, Mod. Syr. tTnania : Atshin and My. lapan,
Arb. thamania, Savu panu, Mg. valu elides the
initial consonant, as in^^o, 7.
Nine. Mg. sivy, Sam. ira, Java sanga, Fiji thiwa,
Tagala siyam, Bisaya aiam, Santo tshiwa, Bouru r^Aia,
Heb. t€8ha\ Arb. fis'a, Syr. thsha^ Mod. Syr. i^s/ia,
Himyaritic (with mimation) tisam (i.€., tea'am) : the
initial is elided in Mg. sivy, Tagala biam, and the 8
also in Sam. iva.
Ten. Mg.folo, My. pulu, Sam./uZu, Kisa wali, Timor
7iulu, Mg. (d.) nel, Rotti AwZw, Santo wZa, Mangarei
(Gabelentz) <wrw, Mg. (d.) turn, Tagala (Forster) polo
and pobo, (Crauf urd) pulu and puvu, Mysol la/u, Arb.
'asharu, 'ashara; Heb. '€«6r, 'asar; Syr. *«ar, Eth.
'SshSru, 'ashartu. We are already familiar with the
change th or ^ to / (see above), and of I to b, as in Java
lintangy My. bintang " star," so Tagala ^fo, jt?o6o, puZu,
/>wvw ; Mysol la/u, lu/u ; Java pula, Philippine
(Forster) apah. Apparently the Anc. "shar" be-
came thar* or tar\ and this changed to fulu, pulu,
puvu. It is easier to recognize the identity of Tam-
bora saroni, Matabello ter, 10, with the Anc. As to
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
THE NUMERALS. 119
the n in saroni compare, perhaps, Himyaritic curam
(mimation).
One hundred. Mg. zato, My. rattAs, Java atiia, Bauton
saatu^ Sula ota^ Caroline tiapugu, Tambora simari, Ef .
tifili^ Santo lifilij d. Id; Bouru botha, utun; Arb.
midlun, miat* ; Amh. mato: Mg. zato (My. ratvs) is the
article z (as in zanaka)^ and ato (for ma^u, m initial
elided as often), and in simari, si is 1, as sia in
siapugvj (g for ^j, and perhaps ti in tifili. The « in
My. ratus may be the same as the n in ii^uti, Himy-
aritic miatura {matum the final m is the mimation),
or the numeral 1, as in balas, literally " one — ten," see
below.
One thousand. Mg. arivo, My. ribit, Java ewu,
Tagala libu, Bisaya livu, Sam. and Tonga dfe,
Arb. alSfw, alf* (Heb. elef, Ehkili o/), Himyaritic
alefum, ahfun (olfTn, alfm), Santo riwun, d. rima,
1,000.
There are many dialects of Oc, especially among
those spoken by the more isolated islanders, in which
the Anc. words from 6 to 10, or some of them, have
been lost, and their place supplied by combinations of
the first five numerals. Thus, for 6, Ende IcTna-sa, Ef .
la-tesa, 5 and 1 ; for 7, Ende lema-rua, Ef. la-ma, 6
and 2 ; for 8, Ende ma-butu, 2 of 4 (two foura), Ef.
la-tolu, Yengen nimweyen, 5 and 3 ; for 9, Ef. li-JUi,
Yengen nimpobits, 5 and 4 ; and for 10, Ef. i^ua-lima,
2 of 5 (two fives), Aneityum nikman ero his two
hands, Tanna karilum karilum Qcari for kadi, 1) 5
and 5, literally " one-five one-five."
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
120 OCEANIA.
The "numbers are expressed distributively by
repetition of the cardinals " in Ef. as in Arb, and
Heb.
The ordinals are expressed by prefixing to the
cardinals the article, as ka, Mg., ka and ke, Ef., and as
Uf Sam., te Ma. They are also expressed by attach-
ing to the cardinals the adj. endings (see above) in
Amh. -ngra, Eromanga -"ngiy Mg. -ny ; and Eth. -i,
-awi, -ai, Maewo -ai, Mota -ei, -i. The ordinal " first "
is in Mg. voalohani, lohani the word for "head,"
loha, that is, first beginning, with the adj. ending m,
Heb. rishoni (and rishon), Sam. ulua'i and Itba'i :
see the word "head" (below). Voalohani is a
denominative, form 3.
The denominative verbs formed from the numerals
in Oc. are the causative and the reflexive. The
causative (baka-) in Ef, and Sam. denotes to do so
many times as the numeral expresses, and corresponds
to the force of the Anc. causative of the same numerals
which in Arb. and Heb. (Arb. ii. and iv., Heb., Piel,
causative) denoted the same. Mg. causative manin-
telo, manindroa to make or do the third, second time,
are denominatives, form 1, of indroa, intelo, in time,
and roa^ telo, 2, 3.
The reflexive signifies to be or be- divided into as
many parts as the numeral expresses, as Mg. raitelo^
midimyy to be or be divided into 3 or 5 parts, to
be threed, fived ; miray, My. haraa, Ef . masiki, to be
oned, one, Arb. viii. (reflexive), see numeral 1.
The verbal noun of the reflexive in My. denotes a
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
THE NUMERALS. 121
fraction, as partiga a third, parlima a fifth. The
verbal noun of the causative in Mg. with the adj. end-
ing expresses the ordinal as faharoa " two fathoms,"
faharoany second, Santo vakaruana second. In the
Anc. languages the numerals in various verbal noun-
forms had various uses.
In all the Oc. languages the numerals 20 to 90 of
the Anc. languages have been lost — that is, the plurals
of the digits, and the analytic equivalent in use is the
numeral 10 combined with the digits — thus, Mg. roa-
polo, My. dwa-pulu, Sam. lua fulu, 20, literally 2 of
10, that is, two-tens, Ef . i^alima 7*ua ; so with the
other tens, as Mg. telo-polo, 30, &c. In counting from
11 to 19, My. prefixes the digit to 10, thus dwi bias, Ja.
rola8 12, My. sahlas, Ja. swalas 11 ; bias is another
form of pulu 10, with the numeral 8 (asa, or sa, 1)
suffixed. Compare Kisa wali 10, ita 1, itawali ita 11.
In Bugis the order is reversed; thus, for My. dua bias
there is sopulo diia, 12 ; and so for My. dua pulu,
Kisa waroh 20, My. tiga bias, Kisa lualikal 30 (kal for
tal 3). In Mg. and Sam. and Ef. a conjunction is used
between the digit and 10, as Mg. roa amby ny folo^
Sam. sefulii ma le lua 12. This Sam. Toa le (for ma
conjunction or preposition "with/* see above), Mg.
amby ny, is in Fiji mani, Ef. mAte in temdte as
malima sikei temati rua one ten and two, 12. This
tem/ite in one dialect is atmate and the initial te is the
article, probably, and temd or atm/i like Arb. alm^
" the with,'' or "that which with," "that with," temxi
te rua that with the two, Sam. ma le lua with the
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
122 OCEANIA.
two, Mg. amby ny roa (perhaps for an ma ny roa
that with the two). With Ef. fema, compare Mysol
and Massaratty f«m, Ureparapara deme, Volow neme,
Amblaw lani, and with Ef. temate, Savo nipiti, Fiji
kamani^ Mota numei ; all these words being used alike
with the numerals. Perhaps Java Ian, My. dan
" and," is the same as Amblaw Ian.
The article, often the " unconscious " article, is fre-
quently used with the numerals, especially with "ten,''
thus Mg. nyfolo, Santo novulu: to this the numeml
"one" prefixed gives Santo 8itnuvulu, dialects
sinafuXu, aabulu. In My. sapidu, Sam sefulu, Pente-
cost aiamnoh, the sa or ae is " one." What in Santo
is sunuvvZu is Oba hangafulu (and novulu is
ngahuka) ; Mallicolo hangafulu, sangafuTy sangafuly
singab; Amb. sanghul, savgul, sangula, songapi;
Easter Island anahui^, Savu singuru, Ma. anga-
hum, Waigyu aamfur. What in these is ngapuki,
novulu is in Celebes mopui^ (article as m), Sauguir
kapuroh. The r or I of this numeral is sometimes
changed to k or g, as Oba ngabuka, Gilolo negio,
Tidore nigimoi (moi " one "), Caroline sik, sig, Pelew
ok; changed to / (as already seen), and elided, as
Mysol yah 10.
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
CHAPTER XII.
Some Fundamental Words.
The following words are of interest, as being nouns
used as prepositions or adverbs : —
Above, over. Mg. ambony {ny, adj. ending, as in
Arb. fa!kani), {amho, avo), Motlav vawo, wo, Mosin
vogo, Arb. fa'ku — supra,
Oba and Pentecost lu, Arb. 'alu, upper part ; Ef.
dialects balo, mahil, Amh. balai above (V the pre-
position).
Sam. and Ha. lalo, Ma. raro, Arb. tahto, Eth. tahta
the lower part or side, under, below.
Outside, without. Mg. ivelany, Tag. vala, Mota
varea, Arb. barra, Syr. bar or var f oris, extra ; ny in
ivelany is the adj. ending, as in ambony.
Fa. taku, tak, Sam. tua, Sunda tukang, My. balakang,.
Arb. thahru, thahr', back, behind, outside. In Ef.
and Sam. "back," "outside."
Sam. fafoy Ma. and Ha. waho, Eth. baafa or vdfa
foris, extra (prep. 6a, as in bdlo, and afa foras, Lud.
Lex.)
Fa. katem, outside of house (er}i house, see below) ;
kat compares with Heb, huts outside (of a house).
Inside, within. Mg. aty (properly " the liver," My.
ati, Fa. and Sam. ate, Arb. ha'tha, the liver and parts
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
124 OCEANIA.
near it), with the simple preposition an (ani) anaty,
Tag. ati, the middle. Analogously Arb. kabid " the
liver " is used also to denote " the middle of a thing."
My. dalam {da, the article), Lampung lom, Fiji
loma, Arb. lobb cor et medulla rei, Heb. leb middle
part, interior, midst, the heart, mind.
Sam. loto, Ma. roto. The Ma. roto denoies a " lake,"
Arb. ra'do a " pool," " lake," a " garden," Sam. lotoa
an " inclosure," Ha. loko pond, lake, Ef. lol a garden,
inclosure, Ef . dialect ro*ra, rodra inclosure, Ef. dialect
lalo the inside, mind (Sam. loto) : the Arb. verb is
raada — bene constitulus fuit animus.
Behind, after. Ef. taku, Sam. tv/i, My. balakang :
see above, under " outside." The simple prepositions
are attached to these forming compound prepositions.
The words " man " and ** woman," and " male " and
" female " (by which gender is analytically denoted),
and such words as "father," "mother," "child," are
important, especially the former, as being much used.
Man, male, husband (homo and vir). Mg. olona. My.
orang, Ef. dtd, at, dialect ita, eta, and Sam. ta or tang
in tangata, Fiji atamata; this last corresponds to Ef.
atamole {mole living), Mg. olombelona^ My. orang-
idv/p " living man." In Ef. opposed to this is atemate
{mate dead), for which see below. Mg. olon^i, My.
orang, Arb. *l8dn, Heb. Ishon, IsL Another form of
this word is in Ef. ano^, or anu^, My. inu, Heb. anash,
enash, anosh, Arm, anasha, and anosha anash. The
s or sh is often changed into th in this word in the
Anc. languages (compare Arb. nat for nas men).
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
SOME FUNDAMENTAL WORDS. 125
Thus, in the Mod. as in the Anc. languages this word
occurs with the radical n and with* the radical n
elided, and also with the formative ending n.
Another word for " man " is in Battak morah, Ef. '
nier, or mera, Arh. mar\ 7nir\ mor\ Mod, Arb. mira,
homOj " mankind in general."
These two words are often combined — thus, Bugis
oroane {bm^oane), and, the r being elided, Bali muwani,
Mysol and Epi man,. This compound word is some-
times reduplicated, and appears in Oc. dialects as
mamoan, monemone, &c., Mallicolo banman. This
compound has sometimes the first word used with it,
thus Ef. d. ata-ma'an, or ata-mo'an ; Epi suman,
Tanna yeruman, Aneityum atamaingy Fiji tangane,
To. taanCy Sam. tane.
Another word is in Mg. lahy, and dahy ; My. Idki
"male," Baju Tidako, Arb. dakar, Arm. dekar, Heb.
zakar, zakur, " male."
Woman, female, wife. My. bini, Bugis baine,
Tanna b^raUy bran, with the above word for " man,"
Eromanga aaiven, dialect yarevin, New Caledonia
tabuan, Fotuna tajlne, Aneityum atahaing, redupli-
cate My. perampuan (for peranperan), Ef. dialect
fa fine, Sam. fa five, Mg. vavy, Mallicolo bdbin, Amb.
vihin (as to this reduplication compare My, lahilaki,
lalaki). Compare with bini, fafini, tafine, tabuan,
yeruman, ataTtming, the above words for "man,'*
" vir," man, banman, and mamoan, suman, yai'uman,
atahaing. Thus fine, buan, beran, is a compound
word which has the same two words as Tnan, viuwani
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
126 OCEANIA,
boroane, but the Anc. f eminines of them. These two
words in the feminine form were actually thus used
for " woman " in Arb. both separately and combined
as 7)iara, or imra, and *u7itha\ and as imraa-untha',
Tanna bran, My. perampuan, Papua Kowiay mer-
wi/ne, other Oc. dialects wawlen, maivina, babayi,
mawina, faijid, mavek, &c. Ef. dialect nguruni
seems to compare with merwiTie, beran, as if for
muruni.
Thus these words, which as denoting " male " and
"female" express analytically the masculine and
feminine genders in Oc, bear in themselves the marks
of the Anc. inflection of gender.
Father. Mg. ray, My. rama, ' Ef . teina or tama,
Sam. tama (in these r or f is the article), My. bapa,
Ef. abu, ava, Arb. abn, Heb. ab, Mod. Syr. baba
Ef. mama, abab.
Mother. Mg. reny, Sam. Una (in these r or Hs the
article), My. ibu, Arb. imu, Tigre eno. Ef. reit\
Celebes leyto. Mod. Arb. walidah, An. Hs', Ef. d. eri,
Ef. d. pde mother (womb), Arb. beten mother (womb).
Child. Mg. aavaka. My. anak, and with article Ef.
nani, Sam. tama, Mg. zanxika. My. kanak, Heb. yonek
infant, suckling. Mg. ankizy (an, article), Eth. Amh.
hetsan infant. Ef. tan, tu, totau, tetea, tetau, titu,
Eth. tsataa', Heb. taetsae*, embryo, young infant. Mg.
fara, Ef. wora, Chaldee bar, offspring. Ef. nasnli,
svli, aili, Arb. naaSV. Ef. rik a child or youth (literally,
small), Eth. dak, the same.
Brother, or sister. Mg. raha (r' article). My. kaka
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
SOME FUNDAMENTAL WORDS. 127
Qc' article), Sam. 'a in tvxi'a (see tua below) ; in Ef.
brother h tai (My. with article andai companion,
friend), Arb. tahir companion, helper, and baZu (liter-
ally " a helper"), Arb. wala* (n. ag. 'ina'lu), to be
nearly related, friend, helper, ally, ma!la brother, &c.,
"iiiuwcdi helper.
Father, mother, brother-in-law. Ef. tauien (ending
en) Mg. zaotra (ending tra), and zoo, Arb. sihm, pi.
ashjami, svJvaray brother-in-law, father-in-law, &c., Ef.
txia sister-in-law, wife's mother-in-law, husband's
mother, Arb. sehrat My. maratuvM, mantuwa,
father or mother-in-law, seems to have this tmva (Ef.
iua), Ef. 'mwo, mo father or mother-in-law, Arb. hami,
hamo, hamaat, husband's, wife's mother, Heb. /tarn,
Iiainoth, father, mother-in-law ; Mg. rafozana (ra the
article, and ending ana) father, or mother-in-law, Ef .
naburuma (article na, and ending ma for na). In
the Mod. languages, the inflection of gender having
been lost, such words as these are in use, whatever
they may be in origin common..
Husband, wife. Ef. wota, wot, husband, lord, chief ;
Fiji t«;afi husband, or wife; Mg. vady, or valy husband,
or wife ; Arb. va'V husband, or wife, also lord, chief.
This Se. word is familiar to readers of the Bible in
the name of Baal. See below on the word Wota,
Ef . idol or deity.
Senior, chief, aged. Ef . kdbuSr (husband, old man
or woman, grey-haired with age), Heb. and Arb.
kahiyr aged, old. Eth. lih aged, senior, chief, Ef. ma
rik old man, chief, bite rik old lady. Sam. alii (article
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
128 OCEANIA.
a), Ma. aHki chief, Mg. and'inana (article and ending
ana), Eth. likna UhXhna dignity of seniority, chief-
ship, lordship. Mg. zoky elder, senior, Arb. sheikh*
senior, a chief.
Body. Mg. va^ana, My. badan, Ef . batako (as if
for batango), Arb. badan, Mg. tena, Sam, Utio, Arb.
tun\
Head, a chief, beginning, first. Java andas, Arb.
alraaSy Matabello aluda, Amboyna uo^ka and vlura,
Mg.ioAa,My. and Sam. and Fiji ulu (Celebes obaku may
be the same as uraka, see the word ten, the numeral,
below, and with obaku compares An. inpek, Ef. bau,
Savu batu, Ysabel pa*u), in all the ancient languages
Heb. rosh, rishahy Syr. risha, head, a chief, beginning,
source, first (Heb. rishoni, Mg, yoa,-lohani, Sam.
ulua'iy and lua*i).
Pillow, or high thing for the head. Mg. ondanoy Ef .
vluma, Sam, alunga, Ha. uliina : see the foregoing
word ulu head, Tonga alnnga high, lofty, a pillow.
The ending has been explained above.
Forehead, aspect. Mg. ray, My. rfae, Ja. raiy Ef. m^,
d, re, Tonga lae, Heb. rai, Eth, rej/, aspect : see above
the verb " to see."
Eye, eyes. Mg. TYiasOy My. mata, Ef. Tnata, mita,
Qiieta; Sam. matay Ja. vvoto, Anc. plural Heb, 'enayothy
'enothy Arb. a'yundt : the '?i is changed to m, as mata
for mi^a. According to the usual rule, the last part
of the word being retained, the initial part is elided ;
the practice of suffixing the pronouns to the word
helped, in this case, still more to draw the voice
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
SOME FUNDAMENTAL WORDS. 12D
away from the initial part; thus, Mg. ny maaony,
My. TncUania, Ef. na metana, the eyes of him, his
eyes. This word, as in the Anc. languages, means also
" fountain."
As meaning spring water, or simply water, it has the
singular form with the unconscious article — thus, Mg.
rano, Ef. d. ran, "water," r article, and Heb. ain,
Arb. ain\ aynu, fountain, eye. This word meaning
" lake " or inland water — that is, spring water — occurs
in My. daTiau, Ja. ranu, Fiji dranUy Sam. lanu. The
Arb. verb 'anfui signifies "to flow" (of water). A
denominative adjective from this word in Sam.,
namely lanua (see above for a adj. ending), signifies
" sore eyes," literally " eyey." A denominative verb
in Ef., form 1, namely bcmgaranu (d. bakanarium^
the n being changed to m), signifies to wash off* salt
water after bathing in the sea with land or spring
water ; Sam. lanu. As to bakanarum (for bakana-
rwn) the na is the article Ef . d. niran " water," and
kana double article as in Mg. nka in manka, form 1.
The radical n is also commonly changed to m in
mata eye (for nata). Another form of this word
with the preformative m is in Arb. ma'inw
(Heb. ma'yan, ma'yn) a fountain, pure water
running through the land; Java banyu, Celebes
nidnu water. See the common Se.-Oc. word for
" water " below.
Nose. Mg. orona, My. idung, Ef. ngusu, and usu ;
Sam. isu, Karoon sum, Batchian hidom, Pelew koyum,
Arb. kha'shum upper part of the nose.
10
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
130 OCEANIA.
Nostrils. Ef. ngore,B,nd kore; Arb. nvkhar\ Cheek,
Arb. fukmu, Ef . bamu, hahu.
Tooth. Mg. nify, Epi libo, Sam. nifo, ArB. nabo. Mj.
gigi, Arb. hakai, Mod. Syr. kika. Compare Mg. kaka
a thing sticking between the teeth. My. siyung, Arb.
Mouth. Mg. and Santo vava, Arb. /am', and fa.
Tongue. Mg. lela, Mj. Udah and lidah, Sam. alelo,
Arb. liBatiy Ch. liahon, Eth. Usan, Heb. laahon, Ef.
mena, Epi pomeno, Santo memena, Guebe mamelOy Arb.
manmolo : Mg. m€nam^nona (ending «a) loquacity.
Ear. Mg. tadiny, My., Ef., and Sam. talinga, Ta.
tayinga, An. tiknga (all these have the article as ^*), -
Heb. (dual) a^tie, Ch. 'uden, *udena, 'una, Syr. ad^Cno,
Arb. (plural) adan\ Eth. e^eti. My. kuping, Lampung
ehiuping, Battak dialects, tshoppinQy suping, Mg,
sofina, Arb, ifctt/, pinnula auris, &c.
Skin. Mg. hoditra. My. iu?i^, Ef. mii, kuli, Sam.
tZi, Ma. fciri, Torres Islands gility Arb. griid!', galad, and
Leg, foot. Mg. ranjo (article ra), My. svJcu, Ef.
Tia^tto (article 7W&), An. thvA), Tanna su, Heb. shok,
Arab, sa^^, Ch. s^afc.
Back. Ef. taku (Sam. ^ua), Arb. thah'i'U.
Breasts, milk of breasts, to suck the breasts. My.,
Ef ., and Sam. sttsu, Mg. noTiOy Ta. 8O8O, Favorlang zido,
Yap and Ulea thithi, An. athi, Pelew (dud, Amh.
tut, Arm. tad, Arb, thidyu, thadyu, thada, Heb.
jAo^, «Aoef. A calabash in Ef. is also called siisu, from
its resemblance to a breast, and in one dialect suduna
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
SOME FUNDAMENTAL WORDS. 131
is "his mother," literally his " breast." The denomina-
tive verb, " to suck the breast," is in My. susui, and
manmsu 1, give suck, Mg. minono 3, to suck, mampi-
nono 5, to give suck, Ef. ausu to suck, Sam. swniy and
fesusui 3,
Hand. Mg. tanana^ d. tangana. My. tangan^ Bali
tanang, Ef. d. nalima, Sam. le lima, the hand, Arb.
alkhams ; in all these the article is the same Se.
article in Arb. as al, Sam. le, Ef . na, Mg. and My. ta ;
and Mg. nana, My. ngan, Ef. and Sam. lima, Arb.
khams, are identical. See above the word "five," Mg.
dimi/, My., Ef., and Sam. lima, Arb. khams, the initial
kh being changed to t (d) and I, and the final s elided.
In tangan the radical kh is changed to ng, and the
radical m to n, as in tanang, Fiji nalinga, Ma. teringa it
is to ngr. The Ef. nalima is never used for " hand "
without the article, which has become " unconscious "
in Mg. and My. It is generally believed by Se.
scholars that the Se. numeral "five" is a word which
originally denoted " hand," that is, the five fingers.
Ef. am (and, with article, nam), Arb. yadu, Ch.
y^dd. Heb. zeroa* (Arb. diva'), Mg. sandry, forearm.
Fingers. Rantsan (ra article), Amh. sat, taat, Tig.
aasavetti, Eth. ataahd't (compare Amh. set, Tig. saboete
woman), My. jari, Ja. jariji {iji, Arb. yadu hand,
perhaps) = My. jari tangan.
Palm of hand. My. tapak,^Qh, tepahy tobah: de-
nominative verb Ef . tahangi (My. tapak) to slap with
the palm of the hand.
The right (hand or side). My. kanan, Mg, havanana
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
132 OCEANIA.
(article as K and h\ and ending an or ana), Arb.
yaraan. Mg. havanana "the being on the right."
This Se. word is connected with aman to trust ; the
right hand is the hand relied upon. In Ef . the right
hand is called Tnatua (Arb. verb mata'a, mati'a,
mature clever eximius) clever, mature, and in Fotuna
matau clever, fit, apt.
The left (hand or side). Tonga hema, Fiji sema,
Arb. shdmat, shuTriay, Tnashdmat; perhaps belong
here (c/. masharaat) Fotuna mazui, Ef. mauri. Ma.
mami, Bugis aheo, Mg. havia (ha, article). My. kiri,
Amh. gXra.
To expound, declare clearly, preach. Ef. fanau,
tafanan, Arb. (Jana 1 n. a. bayan), iv. n. a. ibanaiu,
11 n. a. tabyanu.
To speak. Ef. bisa, basa, Fiji bosa, Tagala basa, My.
bacha, Arb. nabasa (and nabasa) ; Ef . tahisa to speak
with intensity, Arb. ] 1, n. a. the same. Compare Arb.
faska and fasuha. The initial na in such words
was often elided in the Anc. languages.
. Heb. naba, Eth. nahaba, Arb. naba, Ef. dd. not/a,
noa, ni, ti, to declare, tell.
Mg. volana (na ending), My. bUang, Eth. bihil, Tonga
volavola word.
To dispute. Fiji leti, Ef. lea, Fiji veileti 3, Ef. bilea,
Arb. ladda 1, n. a.&ic?<:?\
To know. My. tau, Ef. atae, d. <ad, Heb. yadfa', n. a.
yado*a, da'cUh, de'ah, cf. Mg. ^aina {na ending).
The heart, the mind. Ef. ro, Arb. ro' ; Ef . denomi-
native miro, miroa 3, to think.
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
SOME FUNDAMENTAL WORDS. 133
Mg. /o, Ef . bo or po (i,e,, pwo), Arb. bahw, bahu. In
Arb. and Ef. it denotes the inside of the upper part of
the body — as Frey tag says, " cavitas pectoris." In Ef .
and Mg. the heart (mind). The radical meaning of
this word in Arb. is empty (hence a vacant cavity),
the verb being bahiya to be empty (as a house) ; so
Ef. bua naked, void of anything, Mg. foana (ending
na) empty.
The liver, the inside, the mind. My. ati, Mg. aty^ Ef.
ate, Sam. ate, Arb. ha'tha, the liver. In Mg. it also
means the inside, and in My. the heart — that is, the
mind — but its denoting " the liver " in all the four
dialects shows that that is the original meaning.
Mg. fanahy " the mind " is a verbal noun of form
1, manahy to be solicitous about, careful on account
of ; miahy 3 to be solicitous, careful, and means " the
taking care about . . . hence, the faculty that
thinks . . . the spirit ; " fanahy also signifies
'* knowledge," " intelligence." With ahy compare Eth.
*ivikS, 'eka to be heedful, careful of, to know, Amh.
waka to know, Amb. ikia to know, Ef. mdki (prob-
ably ma negative, and aki I know) " I don't know," An.
mihi, and jihi I don't know (for m', arid /, the nega-
tives, see above).
The inner parts (of the body). My. prut, Ef.
wxirita, Arb. inoraHa,
Mg. kiho, Ef . kahu (kobw inside), Arb. ga'fu.
Ef. tali-kabu, My. tali-prut: see below the word
tali a string.
The inside, the heart. Fiji loma, Arb. lobV ; Fiji
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
134 OCEANIA.
denominative lomana to love. My. dalam (article
da) inside.
Name. Mg. anarana (article an), Ja. aran, Ef.
ngisa (article unconscious ngr), An. itha, Paama isa,
Amb. sa (Sam. ingoa, Ef. d. ngie, for ngiaa), Arb. i87)i\
8im\ Heb. sherriy Eth. sem, Ch. sum; as to the. elision of
the final m, compare the word " blood " : in Mg. and
Ja. it is changed to n.
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
CHAPTER XIII.
Some Fundamental Words, Continued. — Heaven,
Sun, &c.
Heaven. Arb. samay pi. samawai, Eth. samay, pi.
samayat (in Heb. used only in the plural) heavens.
The Ethiopians believed there were seven heavens, one
above the other, as do the Efatese. This word in Oc-
is the Anc. plural (as in Arb. and Eth.) Mg. lanitra,
My. langit (as to change of 8 to I see above, " to hear,"
&c., and below the word " wind "), Ef. elangi (article
as e), Sam. Uingi, In. Heb. occurs reqi'a hashamai(m)
" the firmament of heaven," Ef. d. rikitdangi heaven,
i.e , riki telangi {te, article.)
The verb in Arb. sarna 1, n. a. sumu, signifies " to
be high " and " to raise ;" 2 to name, mention, narrate ;
3 to be uplifted, proud ; 4 to elevate ; 5 high, Sam.
langa to rise from a sitting posture (Ef. fena, leTig, in
tu IsTiay stand up), to raise ; Ef. langa, to raise, also
" to mention f My. ti/nggi high, Mg. langaianga, daTiga-
dcvnga, diTigidingyy height ; milangalangay Tnidanga-
dangay Ef. malanga, rrtalangaiaTiga 3, high, Ef. 6a-
langa 1 (Sam. faalangay exalt, praise) to raise, taba-
langa 4, raised itself, &c., &c.
Sun, day. Mg. maso-andro, My. mata-ari, Ef. Toeta
ni eloy meta ni alo, or simply elo or alo ; Sam. Za, Tonga
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
136 OCEANIA.
Idcc, Tarawan tai, Ma. ra, Amblaw laei, Cajeli leltei,
Amh. and Tigre tsai, Eth. dahai and sahaiy Arb. dului,
the sun. Mg. andro, My. aH, Ef. eio or cdo have the
article (Arb. adduha), Harar eer, Tagala arao, Bisayo
oMaOy Ceram eloh, Silong alaiy Battak arte, Rotuma
astha, Lobo orak, and without the article are Lifu
thu, Mar^ du, Mota lo (Arb. duha).
The Arb. word also signifies " day " and " clearness,"
Mg. andrOy My. ari, Sam. a^o, and ao, Ef. aliati (re-
duplicated), Aneit. athiat, Amboyna alowata ; Ef.
aliati also signifies daylight, or clear.
With ending n (cf, Arb. dahyan clear day) Fiji
8inga, Aneit. s^ngra (in {n)angesenga sun, atjgre, accord-
ing to the analogy of the cognate dialects, is " eye,"
Arb. 'an'), My. siyang, San Christoval sma, Port
Moresby dina, Sokotra shihen (sun).
Mg. maao-andro, My. mata-ariy Ef. meto m aZo is
" eye of the sun," or as in Arb. " corpus et radii soils."
Moon, lightning. Mg. volana (ending na) literally
a " shining," My. bulan, Fiji viula ; Santo hvla, the
moon, a light, lamp, torch; Ef. bilavlla to gleam,
JiliJUi a shining shell ornament, buli a glistening or
gleaming shell, also the ball of the eye,fili (Sam. uili)
lightning.
The verb in Arb. is haJvara 1, n. a. huhur\ to shine,
be bright, " luxit, praecelluit splendore {lima) inter
ceteras stellas ;" huhnr' illuminatio, Eth. transposed
barha to shine, gleam, be resplendent, berhdn light,
luminary; "the primary idea lies in vibrating,
glancing, shining " (Gesenius).
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
SOME FUNDAMENTAL WORDS. 137
Another word appears in Sam. malama (ma article)
a light, a lamp, the moon (Ha. lama a torch), Ef.
aMaTig {aU article, laTig for lam). The verb in Arb.
is lavfia a, or lamxi*a to flash, gleam, glitter, as light-
ning or a star. Ef. miramAi 3, to shine (of the moon),
na mirama light.
Another word appears in Sam. mOfSiTia (ma article)
the moon, sina the woman in the moon (see further
on the mythologic names below). Sin' was the
Assyrian moon-god. The verb in Arb. is sana 1, to
shine, to shine splendidly (as a fire), Ef. ain' to burn
splendidly (as a great fire). In Sam. sina is white
(i.e., pure, shining).
Star. Mg. kintana (d. vaaiana), My. hintang, Java
limtang and wintangy Ef. Tnasei (masoei), Sam. fetu
(Id, li, hi, mxiyfe, &c., forms of the article). An. Tnoijeuv,
Arb. nagm or najm, pi. anjum, anjdm, stella, sidus.
The initial n is retained in Mg. and My. kintana, bin-
tang, elided in Mg. vasiana. An. moijeuv ; the final is
changed to n in Mg., to ng My., to v An., and elided in
Ef. and Sam.
Evening. Ef. dialect dariva, Mg. hariva {d* and K
forms of the article), harivariva, Mallicolo rabrab,
ribrib, An. araparap (sunset), Eromanga pwarap
(evening), Arb. "araba 1, to set (of the sun), n. a.
'*urub sunset.
Yesterday. Mg. omaly, Heb. itmale.
To-morrow. Maraina, morning (ending ina), An.
imraing, Heb. mahar.
Mg, ampitso (article am), My. besuk, Arb. fasaha
to dawn.
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
138 OCEANIA.
Ef. mitintei explained to mean the same as meta ni
aliati — that is, eye or fountain of day, md. This word
for day occurs also in maia or masus to-day, this day —
ma day and '«' or susa this ; ma or mei, Heb. yom, Ch.
emphatic yoma, Arb. yaW, may possibly be the same.
Night, evening. Ef. dialect ran melu evening,
literally time of darkness, ran (r article, and an, Arb.
an time) the time, and mdu dark, cloudy, shady,
shade, Sam. malu shaded, Ef. (with ending) malingo
dark, darkness, My, malam night, Heb. a/elah, a/el
darkness, a/al to set (the sun). Another form of the
word, both in the Anc. and Mod. languages, has n for
ly Heb. pun to set (the sun), and Ef. bong (sometimes
m<mg\ Ja. bungi, Bugis wont night, and in Ef. fanu
for the above melu (malu). Thus in one dialect ran
melu evening, in another kot fanu time of darkness,
kot time, Arb. wakt time, wakat to appoint a time.
Kot fanu is analogous to Arb. wakt almasa evening,
" tempore vespertino." Perhaps Mg. alina night is
the same with Heb. layil, Arb. ZaV, Syr. liliOy Eth. lilit
night. Compare Heb. tin to pass the night, for lit
(" I and n being interchanged.")
Time. Ef. ran, My. dan (article as r and d), Arb.
an. Ef. dialects rang, rak, and lang, nang. See above
for Mg. and Sam. the word when? Ef. mala, Arb.
mala. Ef . kot, Arb. waJct, &c. An. opan, Heb. open.
Water. Ef. vai, wai, ai, Sam. vm, Eth. and Mod.
Arb. mai ; My. ayer, Ef . wai eV (with article noai iV)
" sweet water," Ef. U\ or ilo sweet, Arb. hala 1, n. a.
Jialw, to be sweet: with My. ayer compares Gilolo
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
SOME FUNDAMENTAL WORDS. 139
wayr, Ceram woMi, welo, Rejang beole, Arb. mai holu
(or helu) sweet water.
Running water. Ef . wai or vai sera, Arb. mai jari.
For rano see above.
Rain. Mg. orana (na ending), My. ujan, Ef. usa,
Sam. wa, Arb. **aithu.
The sea. Ef. tdd, Tonga tahi, Ceram taisin, Ja.
tasik, Sam. tai, Arb. ta'a' {tays). My. laut, Ef. rfaw,
oZoti, Gilolo ivolat, Mysol belot, perhaps Arb. malhai,
abyssus maris (so called from being salt).
A wave. Ef. ngalu, Mg. aluna, My. alu, Syr.
galo.
Ef . beau, Sam. peau. My. ombaJc, Arb. ma'gu; Arb.
7na*gu 1, n. a. mdgu, to be tumultuous (of the waves
of the sea), Ef. heafeau,
Mg. rano-masina, masina salt (-Jia ending), masi,
Arb. masi' salt (of water) ; To., Fiji, Sam. masima
salt {nna ending), My. Tnasin, Ja. aain, Mg. masiao,
sour, Amh. mataitau (Eth. raadhidh), sour, acid. Mg.
TYiasirasira saltish, brackish, Arb. madhir* acid.
Earth, land. Mg. ^atij/. My. ^a')^a, Ef. tan, tano
(earth, soil of any kind), Arb. tin' (Ch. tin clay),
dialect tan*. My. utan,'Et. uta, Sam. u^a, Arb. ^'utat
Wind. Arb. nasam', Ef. nalangi, Sam. Tnatangi,
Fiji thangiy Epi jengi, Paama idtigr. My. angin, Mg.
aniifia (ending tia).
Fire. Mg. a/b. My. opi, Ef . Jbaftw., Sam. a/u, Syr. hah
to burn (of fire), Arb. hahhabiit, heat of fire, hubahibu
fire, also a firefly, My. apiapi a firefly.
Smoke. Fiji. Icuvu, My. ufcwp, Arb. 'ukabu.
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
140 OCEANIA.
My. asap {a8\ and api fire), Ef. amia, Sam. a«te,
Heb. 'ashan ; Mg. etona, Arb., *athan\ *uthdn\
Ashes. My. abu, labUy dabn (article V, d*), Sam. lifu,
Fiji dravu, Arb. habut, haba* ; Ef. afwafu, to be dusty,
Arb. habay n. a. hubu.
Stone. Mg. vato, Ef . fatiu, My. 6a^t6, Sam. /o^u, Arb.
bahtv, (Heb. bahat), a kind of stone, probably a kind
of limestone, something like the limestone or coral, the
prevailing stone of Oceania.
Tree, wood, timber. My. hxizo. My. kayUy Ef. kasu,
and kaUy Sam. laau (article la), Epi im, Maramasiki
aiy Heb. 'efs, 'etsah, Arb. 'asa, Ch. a', so called from
being hard (see Gesenius under the Heb. word). Mg.
hazOj Ef. kaau and Jcau also denote " hard." The
original guttural first radical is preserved in some of
the Mod. dialects as ^ or A, and is a mere breathing in
others, as in Ch. ; in some also, as in Ch., the original
middle radical strong sibilant is softened or elided.
Leaf, Mg. ramna, My. dawuriy Ja. ron, Fiji
draUy Sam. lau, Ef. uZi, Arb. waraku. Arb. iv., Mg.
mandravina 1, to put forth leaves ; Fiji vakadrau 1,
to have leaves, literally to make leaves. Mg. changes
the & to V, c/. Idaka, lelajina, &c. Ef. uli is used
only with the article in the construct state, Tiauli
nakasu leaves of trees, or nauliTia its leaf.
Roots, fibres of a root. Sam. aa, Ma. aka, akaaka,
Ef . akoa, My. akar, Mg. faka, Arb. *ekan, ^awa/eVf-
Arb. iv., Mg. mamaka 1, to send forth roots.
Fruit. Mg. voa, My. buwah, Ef. tui, dialect weti.
Sam. fua, Heb. peri, Eth. frey plural faryat, Heb.
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
SOME FUNDAMENTAL WORDS. 141
hiphily to bear fruit, Mg. mamoa 1, to bear fruit,
amoa^ana the bearing fruit.
The r elided, as often, in Oc. ; the Oc. word is the
Anc. plural.
Mg. vokatra, Arb. fakihaty fruit.
Flower, blossom. Ef. i huTYia, Arb. fa'*ama to
bloom, blossom, flower; Ef. bumay Mg. voni, My.
bunga, Sara, funga, flower, blossom.
House. My, rumah, Mg. trano, Ja. umah, Ef.
suma, Mysol Jfcom, Arb. khaym, khaymat ; compare as
to this initial letter Qch) in similar forms in Oc. the
numeral ''five" (see above). Arb. khamSy Oc. Hmay
aima, dimy, ima, and ikma (kima), &c.
Heb. baity baJthahy Arb. bayt\ Syr. ba*tho\ Eth. bel^y
Ef . fare, Sam. fale, Fiji vale, Ma. whare, Maclay Kiiste
(N.G.) badiy Mahaga vadhe,'Bugi8 bolah.
To cook. Arb. tdha 1, n. a. tahw\ tvJiu\ Ef. tao,
and with ending taoniy Sam. tao, with endings taoay
taoina, and tax)na'i ('i the preposition) ; compare Mg.
tanikiay My. tanak, Mg. torn), Sam. tunu, Ef. ^unu,
Mg. taina, tainana, tanina.
My. 6u (to roast), Fiji (doubled) vavi-a (ending),
Ef. beni (ending as in taoni)y Heb. apah to cook,
bake.
A fireplace, an oven. My. dapur (da article, cf.
Celebes puro), Arb. burat a hole or place where fire
is put for cooking, exactly in the Oc. style.
Arb. TndmuSy Mg. memy, Sam., To. umu, Tanna
umio, Ef. urriy and ua, or uwa (dialect) and upu
(dialect).
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
142 OC'EANIA.
Bread. E£. kabu, dialect koau (kawau), {ka article),
Arb. Jum\ panis (turn de omni frumento, quod
coquendo pani inservit). The Ef. kabu is made of
anything grated (as yam, taro, banana, and cocoanut ;
and, latterly, flour), being kneaded into a cake, and
baked in the oven above described. Mg. mofo, My.
pawuTig {ng for n), bread, cake. Craufurd gives My.
apam as Sanscrit ; compare Mg. ampempa,
A torch, lamp. My. auluh, Ef . aulu, Arb. aha'ala,
to kindle a torch, shu'ulu flame of fire, inash'alu
lucerna, Mg. fanilo (cf. My. paniulu v. n. of 1) torch,
flambeau ; Ef . aulu (verb) to scorch with flame, also to
illuminate with a torch.
Way, path. Ef. nahua, Arb. ncMy\ My. scdeh, Ef.
aala ; My. and Ef . to proceed, Arb. shala 1. My. jalan
(Java dalan) to walk, proceed, a way; Arb. darag
1, n. a. daragdn, Heb. darak, to proceed, &c., darak a
way ; My. jalan, Ja. dalan, Mg. lalana a way.
To go. My. laku, Fiji laku, Heb. halak. Assy. n. a.
laku : Heb. helek, Mg. aleha, a way or road. Ef. 6a,
Heb. ba, to go, enter.
To reside, dwell, remain, sit. My. dvdnk, Ja.
dodok, Ef . tok, Arm. tok.
Ef. 710 orne,Saxn.nofo,Heh. navah, nawah, also TtaaJi,
to sit down, rest, to dwell, navah, navath a seat, a habi-
tation ; To., Sam. nofoa a seat. Ma. noJvoanga ; Sam.,
To., nofoanga dwelling place, habitation, sitting place.
The r (for t, th Anc. ending) appears in Tah. nohoraxi
for nohorana a seat, dwelling-place, time or place of
sitting or residing; noho to sit, abide, dwell. Sam.
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
SOME FUNDAMENTAL WORDS. 143-
reduplicated nofonofOy nonofoy and with adj. ending
nofoia, and nofoi, with suffixed preposition (to the
verbal noun) nofoa'i, literally a sitting or abiding for,
" to live in virginity, to sit and talk over news," i.e.,
to be abiding for (a future husband, or the telling of
news).
Large, great, wide, &c. Ef. teletde (adj. ending),
teletelena ; Sam. tele, teletele, tetele; Heb. ddlr, Tanna
dsore, My. (verb form) basar, basarbasar, Sam. vdteU,
The original in Heb. according to Gesenius (adar)
meant to be wide, who compares Arb. adira " to have
hernia (probably to swell out)" Compare Ma. tetere
large, swollen.
Ef. laba, leb, Fiji hvu, Heb. rab, rabah, Ef. baram,
barau, barav, barab, Fiji balavu, long (Heb. rov great-
ness, length), long in time, Sam. loa and leva, Mg.
lava, Sam. lava (Ef. leb), Heb. rab enough (much,
enough), also Ef. malaba. My. hbar broad, wide,
width (Heb. rabath). An. alupas great. My. luwas,
Vanua Lava luwo, Santo Maria lava, San Christoval
rafa. Ma. rahi, rarahi, Tah. rahi, Syr. ra*rab.
Mg. be, Eth. 'a6^.
Small. Ef. kal, Mg. kdi/. My. kichil (kikil), Ja.
chili, Heb. kal. Arb. kaila 1, to be light, small. Ma,
makari.
White. Mg. fotsi/, My. putih, Arb. bada 1 (middle y)
to surpass in whiteness.
Ef. tare clean, pure, white, shining (elo i tera the
sun shines) ; Heb. taker to shine, be bright, pure ; Arb.
taharay to be clean, pure.
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
144 OCEANIA.
Black. My. itam. Tag. itim, Bisaya maitum, Mg.
maintt/, Ef. d. maita, Arb. ahtamu (acf'amu, adhamu,
athama^ &c.)
Red. Mg. menaj My. mera, Ef. miel, mimiel, Sam.
melomelo, memelo, Arb. maHr\
Blood. Heb., Arb. daniy My. (article da) darah, Ja.
rah, Mg. ra, Ef. tra, ra (m final elided, as often). To
bleed (denominative verb, form 3, of foregoing). My.
bardarah, Ef . mita.
Excreta. My. tai/, My. tai, Ef. tai, Sam. tae, Heb.
(tsoah) tseah, &c.
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
CHAPTER XIV.
Some Fundamental Words, Continued. — Animals
AND Plants.
Dog. My. anjing, Java asw, Ceram wasu, yas, Arb.
wazi'u, or wazV.
Ef. kuri^Ha,, kuri, Sam. uli, Mg. alikia (Ma. kiriki),
Arb. garw\ girw, gurw\
Mg. amboa, d. kivahy, Ceram kafuni, Arb. kalbu (?).
Mg. amboa may be " the barker," and belong below.
To bark. Arb. nabaha and fakfaka, Mg. vovo, Ef .
oro ma/ci, dialect buke. Ef. oro to growl, grunt, com-
pares with Mg. ercma growl, roar, Heb. na*ar, Syr.
n'ar to growl, roar, Arb. nakharu grunt (nukhur pig).
Ef . buku to cough, Tanna puka to grunt, Arb. faka,
n. a. fwwokvb singultivit ; these are in imitation of the
sound, as are Arb. nafata^ n. a. nafiytu, Sam. mafatua,
Ef. w/vbtui to sneeze, and Arb. nakhara to snort, Eth.
nehera to snore, Mg. erotra, Ef. Aoro, M.y. ngorok, Sam.
tangulu to snore.
Echo. My. raA;a, Arb. raA;a, Mg. ako. Ef . a^um A;oZ
(fe)Z, Heb. kol) child of the voice, and roa leo repe-
tition of the voice. Sam. i'w leo tail or end or after
part of the voice, *' tail" being in Sam. i't6. My. ekor,
iknr (Ef. ngere tail of a fish), (Mg. aoriana, ending
anfia, back, behind, backwards, Heb. aharon), Heb.
ahor hinder part, rear, end.
11
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
146 OCEANIA.
Pig, swine. Mg. lambo, My. babi, Ef. wak, d. wango,
Sam. ptboa, Fiji vuaka, Amb. babara, Papua Kowiay
ufa, Maclay Kiiste bel, bul, bo, Epi bui, Duke of York
boro, Arb. 'efru or 'ifir\ 'ufr, plural 'i/or', a/or' ; the
Mg. has the article as l\ My., &c., as b\ Mg. and My.
elides the final r, Ef., Sam., and Fiji change it into k,
Ef . also into Tig.
Mg. kiaoa is perhaps the same as Heb. hazir, Syr.
hXziro, Arb. kkinzlr\
Bird, fowl, to fly.
Mg. vorona, My. burung, Ef. and Sam. manu, Java
Toanok, Eromanga menok, Pelew malk, Mallicolo muro,
Arb. farkh, farekh, Heb. eferoah, young of birds, Syr.
parohto (to ending) bird (gen. name). To fly, Heb.
parah, Syr. perah, My. mibar, mabur {mi formative).
My. ayam, Sam. moa, Cocos Island u/a, Ch. and
Heb. *o/. To fly, Heb. 'uf, Arb. *afa, n. a. *ayafdn,
Tonga buna, My, tarbang {tar formative).
A fly. Ceram upena, and phenem (mimation),
Bouru bena, fena. To flutter, Heb. *€p*ep, or 'ifef, a
butterfly, Ef . bebe, Sam. /e/fe.
To fly. My. layang, Arb. *ara (mid. y), n. a. ^aj/r',
^a?^i6rai5, and tayaran (My. layang) ; Ef. <iri, Sam. iete.
Ma. rere (Arb. ^a3/r') ; a fly, My. langau, Ef. and Sam.
Idngo, My. iaii^, Mg. lalitra (Arb. n. a. tarurat).
To fly, clap the wings, flutter. Mg. kopaka, My.
kapak, Sam. *apata, Ef . d. kuvanguva. To. coppcmappa,
Arb. khafaka, and grajfa.
Wing. Celebes A;api, Santo A:at;6, Sam. 'apaau (per-
haps for 'apa'apd), Ch. grop, or g^a/; in Ef. Akz6e is used
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
SOME FUltDAMENTAL WORDS. 147
for pigeon, man hibe bird of wing, or (with adj. end-
ing ni) man kafini, wingy bird — that is, bird strong
or swift of flight.
Feather. Bf. afaru, or here, Arb. abharu, Heb. efccr,
wing feathers.
Nest. Mg. akany, Ef . vJcin, ikin, Arb. waken*, Heb.
ken.
Rat. Mg. totozy (to article), My. tikus (ti article),
Ef. kuaue, Sam. ioU, Ma. More, Arb, gurad* or
jurad\ An. getho {eetho)*
Deer. My. rusa, Arb. rasha! young deer, rasha
peperit dorcas.
Dnck. My. idiky Arb. dik.
Sam. paio, Santo doto, Arb. 6a^^o, Mod. Arb. hoi.
Pediculus. Mg. Aoo, Ef. and My. kutu^ Sam. *w/m,
An. cet, Arb. hathay and hatha.
Flea. Mg. parasy, Heb. par'os. Mosquito. Mg. mo2;<z.
My. nyamuk, Ef. womw, Sam. namw, Ceram wmm,
Arb. na7?it«« a mosquito (Newman, Diet)
Worm, maggot. Arb. 'uthcti, Mg. olitra, My. ulat,
Ef. u2a, Sam. iZo.
.Snake. My. ular, Arb. 'aththa (see preceding word),
Ef. ma^a (article m), Sam. ngata.
Monkey. Ceram ked, Bouru kead, Arb. kishahat
Arb. habbar, Mg. varikia (compare the A;ia in aZzA;2a
dog, above).
Buffalo, cattle. Arb. karhabu, My. karbau, Ja.
A;o6o, Kisa arpau, Timor karau, Waigyu kobo, Ende
kani^a, Mg. omtj/. My. sapi " bos taurus," Arb. dabb'
" taurus silvaticus " ; My. also pronounced sampi.
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
148 OCEANIA.
Fish. Tagala isda, Mg. haza ndrano fish or game
of the water, haza (article ha and final d omitted) " a
chase, a htint," Heb. taad to hunt, Syr. to hunt, to fish*
With Tagala isda compares, perhaps, My, ikan, Ef. ika^
Sara, ia.
Crab. Arb. khukhum*, Ef. (article ra) rakum, d.
rakuwa, Epi lakum, Paama duma.
Banana* Arb. 7)ia*z* (mawz'), Amh. 7nuz\ Sanguir
bitsa, Niue futi, Meli hutsh, Sam. fa'i, Eromanga 60s,
An. ho8, Ef, dt8 (only with article ndU, or ndt\ Mg.
ontsy. My. piaang.
Sugarcane. Ef. parai, Eromanga poria, Mg. fai^,
Arb. baray iv. invenit arundinem sacchari.
The cocoanut palm. Mg. nio, nihio, My. nior, Ef.,
Sam. niu, Arb. sakiyu palm (general name). This
Arabic word is a derivative of the verb " to drink,"
given above, Sam. inu, My. Tninumy Mg. minoTia,
Ef. minu, in all of which the Anc. 8 of this stem
appears (as in the word for cocoanut palm) as n.
Rice. My, baras, Bugis boraa (article b'), Ja. wo8,
Kayan bahas, Arb. aruz\ ruz\ urz\ uruz\ Ja. wo8,
ttiuos (cf, uwong, wong, My. orang man).
Mg. vari (My. padi, Ja. pari) rice, also corn, grain ;
perhaps same as Heb. bar corn, grain, either stored
or growing in the fields. This is a mere conjecture.
Norris (Assyrian Dictionai^, p. 723) says : — " I find
se — pad translated " rice "; if the attribution of this
name have any authority beyond the resemblance of
the My. word padi, adopted in India for " rice in the
husk," it would be evidence of an early commercial
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
SOME FUNPAMENTAL WORDS. .149
intercourse between Assyria and the East." This
name for rice prevails also on the east coast of Africa.
In Mg. " wheat " is called vaH mbazaha, grain (or
rice) of Europeans.
War, fight. Ef. arw hand (see above) is used for
" war " as in the Anc. languages. Mg. ady, Arb. 'ada
to attack, n. a. 'adw\ My. adu.
My. kalahi (i ending), perhaps Bieh,' hayl, force,
army, My. barkalahi 3, Ef. fakal, Fiji valu.
Lance, spear. Heb. romah, Arb. rumhu, My. tum-
bak, Mg. in voatomboka, mitomboka, speared, and
perhaps Sam. tao.
Club, Mod. Arb. nabbud^ nabbuty Ef. rabat
Bow. Arb. bani, bainai, or baini, My. panah, Tag.
pana (Sam. au/ana), Ef. in tali-tan^ra string of bow.
Arb. ka^sUf Ef. dsu only with article ndsu or nds.
Cord. Ef . taU, Mg. tody, My. tali, Heb. yeter, Arb.
watar' (of bow, &c., see Ef. tali-banga, bow string).
Arrow. Eth. nadafa to shoot with an arrow, Ef.
tiba, ne tiba an arrow, Mg. tsipikia,
Heb. hetSy Eth. hets, Ef. us, Sam. w. Sam. an arrow, a
reed, Ef . a reed. The Sam. and Ef, arrows are reeds.
Clothing. Mg. lamba, Sam. lava-lava, Ef. lufa
(Tagala lumput), Heb. labash to put on clothes (Arb.
labisa, Eth. labs, Syr. Ubas), lebush clothes, Arb. libs'
(pi. lubus), labus. This is the common word for cloth-
ing in the Anc. and Mod. languages. The above word
in Mg., Ef., and Sam. denotes, as in Mg., " the usual
dress or cloth worn by the natives." This was worn
round the loins.
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
150 OCEANIA.
It was called in My. sarung, Fiji sulu, probably the
same as Arb. izar' (izarun), clothing worn round the
middle of the body — that is, just as in the sarung or
suit*. This word occurs in Ef. also as the name of the
dress of the Ef. women which was called miseH, Arb.
mizar\
The cloth worn in Ef, and Sam. was not woven, but
made in ah elaborate manner out of the bark of trees
and other substances, and called in Ef. fon, Sam.
siapo (in Ef. siapo is the name of a tree).
A basket, to weave. Heb. sene (sana), (Ch. serie)
a basket, from an unused verb sana, Arb. wadhana
to weave, plait, Ef . tonga (Sam. tango) a basket which
is woven or plaited. My. tanun to weave with a loom,
Mg. tenona the warp and the weft, and denominatives
manenona 1, to weave, tenoniina woven.
Earthen pot. Heb. parur: pahar, Arm. pahar a
potter, Arb. fakhar, {fakhdy^un) a pot, a potter, and
fakharat, pi. fakhar' hydria, vel vas figlinum ; Mg*
vilany, My. balanga. In Ef. the art of making
earthen pots has been lost, but fragments of pottery
are strewn all over the island and called bxiro ki Li
Maui tukStukl — that is, the pots of Li Maui tuketuki,
or female Maui tuketuki ; and also buro noai ki Supe,
water pots of Supe or the Ancients. In the same way
the making of shell axes has recently fallen into disuse
since the advent of European axes, and the old shell
axes are found strewn about near villages, and are
called Karau ki Supe, that is, the Karau (or axes) of
Supe, or the Ancients. Kdrav, in other dialects of
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
SOME FUNDAMENTAL WORDS. 151
Ef . is Mranfi and Mrab, Heb. hereb any sharp cutting
instrument.
Knife. Arb. musay (masa to shave) My. piaau,
Bugis, Ja., piao, peso, Mg. antsy (see the word banana
OTdsy, My. pisang), Ef. mash; Ef. masi to cut, or
shave off the surface.
A word for " pot " is in Fiji kuro, Santo khuro (both
in these places and in New Guinea pottery is still
made), New Guinea (Motu) uro ; this may be the
same as Ef . buro (by change of 6 or / to k), or perhaps
we should compare Heb. kir, which, like the Fiji kuro,
denotes " a cooking pot" made of earthenware.
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
CHAPTER XV.
Some Fundamental Words, Continued. — Writing,
Navigation, Religion.
Writing. Mg. soratra (and soritra). My. tvZis, Ef.
mitiri (mi formative), Sam. tusi (this word has been
introduced to Ef. by the missionaries to denote
** book"), Arb. surat (verb ii., to '*form, draw, trace,
paint") form, likeness, figure, musawir sculptor,
painter, author of a book, Eth. sa'ala to paint, to make
figures, Heb. sv,r to form ("from the idea of cutting").
Mg. soratra colour, writing, soritra a mark, sculpture,
My. tulis drawing, delineation writing, Sam. ttusi, a
mark, a figure, Ef. mitiri a figure either cut or
engraved, or painted, to make such figures, to write.
The figures made by the Efatese were cut or 'painted
on their bodies or on their idols. Denominatives
from this stem are numerous, as Mg. manor atra 1, to
arrange silk of different colours in the loom, also to
write ; and manoritra to mark, engrave ; Ef . mitimi-
tiriy Mg. TTiisoratra printed as cloth (such as we call
"print" — that is, cloth with designs printed upon it);
My. tulis " to draw, delineate, paint, picture, figure,
write ;" Sam. tusi to mark cloth (siapo), write. The
ending t of surat appears as tra and t in Mg., as 8 in
My., and is elided in Ef. and Sam. The initial s is
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
3
o
Q
h3
Digitized by CjOOQ IC
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
SOME FUNDAMENTAL WORDS. 155
changed in Eth. and Mg. to 8, in My., Ef., and Sam.
to t, and the r to I in Eth. and My., to 8 in Sam.
Story or tradition. Arb. haka dixit, naiTavit
{traditionem), Ef. kakei a tradition, or history, of
which there are many among the Efatese (such as
they are), narrated on special occasions by recognized
experts (old men), the whole audience breaking in at
fixed points in the narration and singing part of the
story. Compare Mg. haga "a tale, a fable," which
seems the same word, and My. kawin, kakawin, tale,
story, narrative. This word has been recently intro-
duced by the Mahommedan Arabs as hakayat (My.),
ekayak (Bu.) It is interesting to observe that in this
and many similar cases where the Anc. Oc. word and
the Mod. Arb. recently introduced word are both used
in My., neither the Arabs nor Malays have the least
idea of their identity. Another example of this is
seen in the word " writing," in My. tulis : the Mod.
Arabs have introduced surat, and the denominatives
manidis 1, and manurat 1, are both used for "to
write."
Ship, Mg. sambo, Heb. 8^2^ina, Arb. safinat ; Ja.,
Tagala sampan, a boat.
My. prahu, Tagala parau, Malayta bam, Arb.
markabii, verb rakaba vectus f uit (on a ship, animal,
or vehicle), so Ef. boravu or barau, Sam. folau, Fiji
vodo, a being carried on a ship, and, when horses and
vehicles became known to the Efatese and Fijians, a
being carried on them, a riding, Ef. i barau ship,
horse, or carriage. So in the Anc. languages.
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
156 OCEANIA.
Ef. 7^a7*iia {tiri, riH to fly), Gilolo deru, Tagala
darwng, Arb. tayaratu (tara to fly).
Mast. Arb. sariat' (sariatun), Mod. Arb. sari, Mg.
salazana, My. tiyang, Ef. tere, Amb. turi.
Sail. Arb. kila'at\ My. laj/ar, Fiji Za^Aa, Mg. lai
{lainUambo), Ef. Zai (with article nilai, as if originally
ilai), Sam. Za.
Oar, or paddle. Arb. ''aduf ("(zdufun). My. dayung,
Papua Kowiay otow, Marshall Islands thebwe, Sala-
wattitoa/>; Arb. mikda/*, mi"cla/ ', and migdaf or
Tnijdaf, Amh. makzaf, or ma'zaf, Bisaya bugsai,
Segaar baessa, Fiji t/o/Ae, New Ireland, Mallicolo, An.
«^M05, €6o«, qpo«, Ef . u;o«, Sam. foe, Mg. voy.
Weeping, wailing. Mg. tanyf My. tangis, tangisi
(transitive), Ef. tangi, in construct state tangisi
(transitive), Sam. tangi, withadjective ending tangisia,
fetangisi 3, Arb. dama'a (in Heb., Arm. also), n. a.
dam*, damia*; damiat prone to tears or weeping (fern.),
Mauvo tavgtangisa (Codrington). The Arb. and Oc.
word denotes to weep, to wail. The wailing of the
Oceanians, as of the Anc. Semitic world, on occasion
of a death or burial, is loud, and, while very mournful
and weird, not unmusically expressed. In Ef. neigh-
bours and friends come from long distances to perform
this duty. Tears flow copiously. When 50 or 100
men and women are wailing in concert the sound can
be heard long distances across the water and even
on the land. There can be no doubt that as this
wailing is called by the same name, so it is practised
in the same way now in Oceania (in, for instance, the
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
SOME FUNDAMENTAL WORDS. 157
New Hebrides) as in Arabia and the neighbouring'
Semitic-speaking world 4,000 years ago. To wail for
the dead is a religious duty that no one ever thinks of
neglecting ; a person would be considered worse than
an infidel, dehumanized, that refused to perform it.
Sacred. Ef. tab, tabu (taboo), Sam. tapu, Arb.
dabba to prohibit, n. a. dabbu ; the radical meaning
of this word in Oc. is " prohibited," "forbidden;" thus,
Ef. nafisuruen i tabu lying is forbidden (bisuru 3, to
lie, suru to deceive, lie, Heb. zur, cf. Arb.) In Ef. and
Sam. tabu (taboo) a thing, as, for instance, cocoanuts,
to make it prohibited.
In Ef. nata tabu, "sacred man," is a man set apart to
the service of the gods, or as their agent, and who
prohibits people from doing what the gods do not wish
done, and points out the way to be pursued.
In My. larang to prohibit, and larang sacred, Mg.
vara to prohibit, Arb. rada'a, n. a. rad' (rad'un) to
prohibit.
In Mg. Tiiasina holy, sacred, efficient, is literally
"salt," hence pure, sincere (see the above word "salt,"
masina), Arb. mathi' salt (and cf, mothath* very salt ;
pure and sincere). Salt is a natural symbol of purity
or sincerity, and has always been so regarded by the
Semitic-speaking world.
Bury. This word occurs in Ef. mythology. Ef. ofa
or dfa, Mg. afina, Arb. "aba to be hidden, "ayaba ii.,
to hide, to bury (hence "ayab' the grave, Ef. dfa ki to
bury (the dead), alia dfahien place of burial. Tdfahi
(f article) a certain mythological person, " the Burier,''
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
158 OCEANIA.
Mg. ajina, voafina, and miajina 3, concealed, viaTiaJina
1, to conceal, to bury (so Arb.) In Ef. the body was
carefully prepared for burial, and dressed. The burial
was accompanied with much solemnity ; great wailing ;
animals slain in sacrifice to the dead at the grave.
It was supposed that the spirits or essence of the
animals slain would accompany the souls of the
deceased to the spirit world, the entrance to which
was the westernmost point of Efate, at a place called
TuMtuM, Hades was below, and had seven stages,
one below the other, each of which had a name.
The . soul died six times, finally passing out of
existence. At the gates of Hades the soul was exam-
ined b}^ a personage called Seritau and his helpers
Vaus (Question) and Maki (Don*t-Know), and if
found wanting was handed over to Masecbsi (Cutter-
out), who cut out its tongue by the roots,^ split its head
open, and turned it backside foremost. SeHtau is the
name of the ofiicial at each village who cut up the
bodies on occasion of a cannibal feast. The Hades
Seritau is therefore a dreaded being, the punisher with
the extreme penalty of criminals. The extreme
penalty of transgressors was to fall into the hands of
Seritau — that is, to be cooked and eaten. In threaten-
ing, instead of saying " I will kill you," " I will cook
you," or " bake you in the oven,'* was more common.
The Efatese criminal dreaded not being hanged or guil-
lotined, but being eaten. Two kinds of people were
allowed to pass into Hades unharmed by Seritau,
those belonging to a certain tribe called Namkatu (a
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
SOME FUNDAMENTAL WORDS. 159
kind of ysLin — every Efatese belonged to a tribe called
by the name of some plant or animal), and those who
had printed or graven or branded on their bodies cer-
tain marks or figures (tatooed) called mitiri (see
writing, above), and keikei {cf. Heb. ka'aka\ Lev. 19,
28).
Sacrifice, offering, fasting. Mg. faditra an offering
made to avert evil, fady tribute (in fadi ntseranana
custom-house dues), My. bda expiation, to care for, to
aid, to requite, to sacrifice oneself on the tomb of a
husband, sambcdih 1, to sacrifice, slaughter an animal
with religious forms ; Mg. fady abstinence, imp. fadia
be accursed ; Ef. hdi, or ball, to fast, and, perhaps,
beli animal slain at a grave ; faditra, cf Arb. bala\ or
baliyaty camels which the pagan Arabs used to tie up
at the grave of the dead, leaving them without food
and water, to die, in order that at the resurrection the
dead might have camels to ride upon and be happy,
and not have to go on foot and be miserable; or a cow,
sheep, she-camel, or goat slaughtered at the grave in
'* the times of ignorance ;" the Arb. and My. word also
means '* affliction," and the same idea is in the Mg.
fadia be afflicted, accursed, and Ef. bali perhaps
means to afflict oneself. The Arb. verb bala' means
to afflict, sacrifice (camels, as above), be afflicted, to
care for, confer a benefit, recompense, swear, or take
an oath, &c. The verb in Eth. means to be old, in
Heb. wasted through age, care, affliction, &c., and belo
(Chaldee) denotes a species of tribute. The word is
also seen in Mg. alafady, voafady, and perhaps voady ;
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
160 OCEANIA.
voady a vow, voafady spoiled, alafady (ala remove),
a freeing from ceremonial defilement.
Mg. sorona a religious sacrifice, also reservedness,
shyness, compares with Ef. sum to hide (as if to hide,
i.e., atone for a crime or sin), Eth. sawara texit, pro-
texit, occuluit, celavit aliquem.
Arb. ta'umaf a sheep kept to be sacrificed (verb
ta^ima to eat), Sam. taumafa to eat. Haw. kanmaha
to sacrifice, Tah. taumaha " a portion of food oflfered
to the gods or spirits of the dead," Ef . taumafa to ofier
anything in sacrifice to the gods or spirits of the dead,
but especially food ; when the food was cooked, and
so to speak dinner on the table, one would say kuga
taumafa tu natemate aningita, tuga fami (fam eat,
Heb./(xm),that is, give an offering (a portion of the food)
to the Natemate, and let us eat, it being considered pious
to give the ofiering of food to the gods before eating ;
nataumafan the sacrificing, a sacrifice or ofiering.
The Anc. ending t is changed in this word to h, and /
or V, as often (above). As with animals so with
food, or any other thing oflTered, the Efatese thought
that its essence became the property of the spirits
or gods.
To fast, a fast. Ja. siyam, Arb. sama 1, n. a.
siyam\ to fast. My. and Tagala puwasa, Mod.
Syriac mablth, " to abstain from food," is perhaps the
same stem.
To pray to a god. Ef . tarusa, as tarusa natemate,
Arb. n. a. salut Dei invocatio (verb sola 11, to pray
reverently to God on bended knees) : Sam. tatalo to
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
SOME FUNDAMENTAL WORDS. 161
pray, with adj. ending talosia, to pray. The Anc»
ending t appears as s in Ef. and Sam. in this word.
The gods or objects of worship. These are called
by the Efatese by the general name of natemate (so
in the New Hebrides generally). Natemate^ or with-
out the article atemate, is ate a spirit, and mate dead,
and denotes literally "spirits of the dead." The word
ate is identical with the above ata or (ite a man, a
person, the common word for "man," as was shown, in
the Ancient and Oceanic languages. This word, as in
Arb., so in Ef . denotes also v/mbra he/minis the shadow
or image of a man, and the spirit or soul. So Sam.
ata spirit, shadow. Arb. anisu spirit (of a man),
naav,, nat\ or natu, homines, etiam, genii, daemones,
Mulgraves anis and aniti, Tagala anitu, My. and Ja.
antUy Sam. aitu spirit, ghost, "demon"; the same word,
with the adjective ending a, as atua, is used for "God"
by the Christianized natives of the Pacific generally
now, but originally denoted, as Mariner has given it, "an
immaterial being, as a god, spirit, soul or phantom."
In Ef. ata "man/' "spirit," "shadow," or image (of
man) ; it does not denote shade or darkness, for
which there is an entirely diflferent word. So
Arb. The spirit or ghost of a dead man was
supposed to resemble the living man as his image
in water or a looking-glass. As ate- or atamate
denotes the spirit of one deceased, so atamauri the
spirit of a living man, supposed to have gone out of
him during sleep. The Efatese declare that they
sometimes see both atamate and atamauri (see m/ite
12
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
162 OCEANIA*
dead, and vnauri living, above). It may be remarked
that in My. and An. this Se. word *' man *' (see above)
is used as in Arb. and Heb. to denote also the '' pupil "
or " littleman" of the eye : My. orang-mata, An. esnga
nimte, Arb. mean or isan elayn (see " eye," above),
imaguncula in oculi pupilla apparens, Heb. ison ayn ;
in An. eanga is also the '* spirit " (or spiritual counter-
part) of man.
The ata mate or atua (Meli itu) were spirits having
reason like men and supernatural powers like God.
Whence did the Oceanians derive their ideas of these
latter ?
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
SoiKS AT LiLEPA, Havannah Harboub, showiko Napeas.
From a photograph by Captain Acland, H.M.S. ** Miranda,**
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
CHAPTER XVI.
Some Fundamental Words, Continued.
God, the Supreme Being. Takaro. According to
Hale Tangaloa, called at Fakaofo Tangaloa i hinga
i te langi, " Tangaloa above in the heavens," was pro-
bably the Supreme Being of the Polynesians. He says :
— " It seems likely that this was the original deity of
the Polynesians, perhaps before they left their pristine
seat in the East Indian Archipelago " ( United States
Exploring Expedition, vol. vi.). In the northern
New Hebrides this name is pronounced Takaro, and
there, as in the central Pacific (Sam., Tonga), Takaro
is the creator of aU. The Rev. Mr. Landels, mis-
sionary on Malo (between Mallicolo and Santo), where
the people go quite naked, says that Takaro is
described as residing "above the sky." "They (the
Malo people) say that Takaro made everything, that
nobody ever saw him or spoke to him, and that he
only talks to the big chiefs at night in sleep."
TaMro is probably ta the article, and kd,ro mighty,
Arb. kahharo mighty, with aricle alkahharo ; the
Almighty, Deus (Freytag). For the article ta, Arb.
al, see above. The adjective kdra strong, is much
used in Ef., and is pronounced indiflferently Jcdra and
ngdra, strong.
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
166 OCEANIA.
It is remarkable that while Taharo or Tangaloa
{Taaroa, &c.) is thus recognized as the Supreme
Being, no particular worship is rendered to him ; the
worship and the oflferings are rendered to the atua or
ata-mate. It was very much the same in the ancient
Semitic-speaking heathen world. We see in the
history of Israel how prone men of whom better
things might reasonably have been expected were to
ignore God, or merely to give Him a barren title,
while devoting themselves with ardour to the worship
of idols, such as Baal. " In their offerings (says
Gibbon of the Arabs), it was a maxim to defraud God
for the profit of the idol — not a more potent but a
more irritable patron." The pagan Arab had more
excuse for this than the Israelite. We cannot
wonder, therefore, at what we see in the Pacific as
just referred to.
Names of God in Mg. The Malagasy call God
Andriamanitra, probably, as Humboldt and others
have suggested, for andria Icmitra, chief or lord of
heaven; also Andriananahary, and ZaTtahary^ the lord
creator, the one or he that created, nahary being form
1 of the verb ary to exist, to be, past tense, mahary
make to be, create, nahai^ created (Mg. Dictionary,
s. V.) Andrlana-nahai^ " God, the Creator of the
Universe " is more exclusively applied to the Supreme
Being, the other two names also denoting the spirit of
a deceased sovereign, and anything supernatural.
In Tahiti rimaatua, hand of God, denotes " some
sudden disease supposed to be infiicted immediately.
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
SOME FUNDAMENTAL WORDS. 167
by the hand of God ; also strife and ill-will between
persons."
The human " spirit" was called by the above name
ata, &c ("man"), not because it was supposed to
resemble a shadow, but because it was deemed the
genius or essence of man, and umbra hominis cast
by the sun or reflected in water was called by the
same name ata (" man "), because it resembled man ;
and this is equally true of the ancient Arab and the
Oceanians who use this word in these senses, as shown
^bove. A "demon" (in the ancient sense of that
word) was called by this same name (" man ") by the
Arabs and Oceanians, because it was supposed to be
the spirit of a deceased man. Further, neither the
ancient Arabs nor the Oceanians derived their ideas
of a Creator or of Divine powers from this word for
spirit, although the Oceanians have come to denote by
it supernatural beings with divine powers, as all such
from the lowest to the highest are conceived of as
" spirits." That they have done so is manifestly not
connected with the dawning of a knowledge of God,
the Supreme Being, among them, but with the gradual
disappearing, during milleniums of degradation, of that
knowledge from among them, or its being gradually
entombed in the ever-growing mass of ignorance and
superstition.
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
168 OCEANIA.
Idols and Mythological Beings, &c.
Wot. The Efatese idol WotH, or W5t See above
under the word husband. Arb. ha'l\ husband, wife,
lord, Baal, Tahiti fatu lord, master, chief (Arb. ba'luu),
Mg. vady and valy husband, wife (Fiji wati), Ef.
husband, lord or chief, Wota, i.e., Baal. This is the
word all over Efate for. "chief* — that is, lord or
possessor — ^and the idol Wota is the great idol wor-
shipped by all the Efatese. The idol is a pillar-like
rock in the sea about 15 miles from Efate, but sur-
rounded by the islets of the Shepherd group, in all of
which the Efatese dwell. The shape of the rock is
that of the Anc. Baal pillars. In passing this rock in
a ship the Efatese used to lower their heads or veil
their faces. At each village in Efate was a group of
wooden pillars (napea) in the public worship ground,
where the TtateTnatea of each village were worshipped.
On these pillars, which were erected in honour of the
natemates — that is, their deceased relatives — and on the
upper part of them (see the photo.), was carved a
human face called narai nawot, the face of Wot,
lit. "of the Lord." This, as far as the word Wot
is concerned, might mean either the face of the
chief (of the village), meaning the deceased chief,
or the face of Wot — that is, the idol Wot. Most prob-
ably it orginally meant that of the idol. The present
natives can throw no light on the matter ; but they
say, and no doubt rightly, that narai nawot does not
mean the face of the village chief. Further, the same
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
W H
I
n
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
IDOLS AND MYTHOLOGICAL BEINGS, ETC. 171
face is found carved upon the bodies, usually upon the
shoulders, but also upon the chests, of the people, and
called Tiarai nawot, and this was doubtless " the face of
Wot/' the idol. The Efatese ball hi Wota, fasted for, or
to obtain the favour of Wota, made offerings or sacrifices
to Wot, and worshipped Wot and other idols in a
most elaborate maimer by lectisternia. Wota was
peculiarly the god supposed to be able to give riches
and happiness, and hence was often called Wota an
nidn, Wot of wealth or plenty. The name Wot
frequently occurs in proper names as Mare-Wota man
of Wota, which is the name of one of the teachers, or
native pastors, in Havannah Harbour. Wota is said
to have a wife, or rather there is a natural cave on
the coast of Efate, opposite to the idol, which is called
" the wife of Wota."
The ancient idea of Baal seems to have been as of
the male principle of nature, and connected with the
sun as the vivifying influence of the world. There
are distinct traces of sun and moon worship in the
New Hebrides. Sina (see above word " moon ") was
worshipped on Aneityum, on which island there is
a remarkable rock, which I visited with the Rev. Mr,
Lawrie in 1883, whose smooth faces are covered with
engraved figures, among which are figures of the
turtle, the sun, and the moon. The sun is represented
by a rayed circle as in the ancient Semitic (Assyrian
and Phoenician) monuments, and the moon by a half*
circle. These half -circles are carved on trees all over
Eromanga, and there are sacred stones of the same
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
172 OCEANIA.
shape, and also stones shaped as full circles, represent-
ing the moon, very common on that island. A stone
on Fotuna has the sun and moon carved upon it.
For these facts I am indebted to the Rev. H.
Robertson, of Eromanga, and Dr. William Gunn, of
Fotuna. In the cave of Felles, at Lilepa, Havannah
Harbour, there is a rayed circle easily recognized as
the same as the sun circles on Aneityum, and it is
called narai nawot the face of Wot — that is, the face
of Baal, the sun god.
Maui, Of the meaning of this and the following
name I can only give conjectures. Hale considers
Maui as perhaps a name, originally, of God as Pre-
server and Sustainer of men. The Tongans, as reported
by Mariner, described Moooi (po = u), i.e., Maui, as
the god " that supports the earth, the earth lying on
him, he being prostrate." Mariner gives as the Tongan
verb " to live " vioooi " life, convalescence, fertile (as a
field), to live, subsist;" this, with ending, is mooonoo
** prosperous," and the latter with adj. ending ia
inooonooia " prosperous." There can be no doubt but
that this is the word, given above, that occurs in Mg.
as aina (ai — na), miaina to live, be prosperous. The
Anc. form of this word is given above. Moooi or
Maui is probably the Anc. verbal noun Eth.
mahyawiy Arb. Ttiohyi, Arm. mafie preserving
alive, preserver, sustainer, literally, "causing to live."
Hence the word might be used either as a name
of God or of men. In Arabic it was one of the
names of God, and is so used in the Koran. In
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
IDOLS AND MYTHOLOGICAL BEINGS, ETC. 173
Ethiopic it occurs as the name of a man Mahyawi
egzia, Ma/iyawi — the chief. In Oceanic it is some-
times one, sometimes the other. Thus, as a name of
men that figure in the ancient myths or traditions, it
often occurs. Hale says that Maui is also at Tahiti
and New Zealand sometimes the name of the chief
deity, the creator of the world. Maui is sometimes
represented as catching the sun by its beams, and,
beneficially to men, regulating its movements.
Tiki. Tiki is represented as the first man at
Tahiti (his wife being Sinay who is now in the mpon),
and at Raratonga the first man, who, after he died,
obtained dominion over departed spirits, so that a
person who died was said to have " gone to Tiki." I
think that most probably tiki, Ef. tvJci and tiJd means
old, ancient. In Ef . Maui tukituhiy or Maui tikitiki
is the first man, who, together with his ofispring,
TamaJcaia, hauled up the islands from the sea. Maui
tikitiki, according to this, means Maui, the exceedingly
ancient. The word tiki may be the same as the Arb.,
Heb., and Ch. " atlA5" old, ancient. Ef. Maui tikitiki
occurs in Fotuna as Mo-shishiki, Tanna as Ma-tiktiki,
and in Aneityum as Moi-tikitiki. It may be observed
that the ancient stories of the beginnings of things, in
which the persons denoted by these names figure, vary
considerably.
In Ef ate what we call " the man in the moon " is
called li Maui tukituki rae atenina female Maui
tukituki and her grandchild. In Sam. Sina is the
woman in the moon : see the word ** moon" above.
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
174 OCEANIA,
It is doubtful if tiki or tuki means old, but we
may, perJuXpa, compare Fiji tuka an old man, grand-
father, very old, immortal, immortality, and My.
ddtuk {dd article) an old man, a grandfather, a senior
or chief. On Aneityum I recently inquired of the
best-informed natives as to what moi-tikitiki meant,
or who he was. They told me that it meant nefatimi,
that is, "old man," and that he was nefatimi ati
inpece, the old man who placed the land or made the
land ; in fact, they said that he might be indifferently
called moi'tikitiki or nefatimi ati inpece. At Anei-
tyum Sina is the woman in the moon, and the wife of
the sun. In Ef. li mdui tukituki is said to have been
carrying water home when the land had just risen (at
the beginning) from the sea — the land was unstable
and moving about: she threw her water-jars down
upon it, and knocked it into steadiness with the
shock; but the water-jars were smashed to pieces,
hence the fragments of pottery found all over the
island are called the buro or water-vessels of li maui
tukituki. This is a specimen of the myths of the South
Sea Islanders. A very widespread myth is that in
which the islands are represented as being drawn or
fished up from the sea, which seems to be a wreck of
some ancient account of the creation of the world.
In another the regulation of the movements of the
sun, so that they might not be too quick (Central
Pacific), and on the other hand so that they might
not be too slow (Ef ate), is spoken of ; in another the
introduction of death into the world. An Efatese
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
IDOLS AND MYTHOLOGICAL BEINGS, ETC. 175
bird (Manu tangisi merely the bird that bewails men)
has red marks under its eyes to this day, which it
acquired by weeping for men at the first introduction
of death among them. From these and such like
myths, taken alone, we could not learn much with
certainty ; but, taken with the knowledge which we
gain from the scientific investigation of the Oceanic
languages, we have no hesitation in saying that we see
in them, beyond all doubt, the traces of the ancient
account of the creation, of the genesis of the world
and man, that pervaded the ancient Semitic-speaking
world. And, reasoning in the same way as to the ideas
of Divine Powers, of a Supreme Being, or of God, and
the names for the same among the Oceanians (ideas
almost — but never, I believe, quite — obliterated, or
distorted beyond recognition among some of the
grosser savages), we see in these, beyond all doubt,
what are in the circumstances the natural remnants,
however attenuated or degenerated, of the knowledge
of the Supreme Being — God, the Creator of the world,
the Almighty, the Author and Sustainer of Life — that
pervaded the ancient Semitic-speaking world, and
that was always in danger, even in that ancient world,
of being overgrown by, or buried beneath the rank
growth of, superstitious doctrines of " demons."
Among the idols of the Oceanians are many so-called
"sacred stones." These are sometimes small round
stones, that can be carried easily ; sometimes large
fixed stones, or even big rocks on the land or in the
sea. They seem in no essential way different from
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
176 OCEANIA.
the sacred stones that were worshipped in pagan
Arabia ; and the same may be said of sacred trees.
These stones in Efate are called not* tab sacred spirits,
or fatti tab sacred stones, and represent either the
spirits of dead men, or such beings as Wot, who,
although sometimes described under the general name
natemate (used in that case in the sense of Sam. atua^
that is, spirits, or spiritiml beings), yet is not regarded
as a natemate in the narrow sense of being the spirit
of a deceased human being.
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
1$
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
EynuNCE of Felles Cave, Lilepa, Havannah Harbour.
From a photograph by Captain Acland, H.M.S. Miranda^
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
CHAPTER XVir.
The Oceanic Family and Relationship System.
It is with the idols, myths, religious ideas and prac-
tices, &c., of the Oceanians, as with their dialect : they
vary among diflferent tribes. If they do so even in a
limited area — such as, for instance, in the New
Hebrides, or even in one island of that group —
how much more throughout the numberless and
widely separated groups and islands of Oceania.
But the variation is not such as to destroy the
general family identity. Thus, even in the New
Hebrides the myth of Maui tikitihi varies in every
island, yet it is manifestly the same, or rather it is
manifestly the same in origin. So what is found in
one tribe yet practised or related may have completely
disappeared from another, just as one dialect has a
word or a form which is not to be found in another.
And with respect to both the religious and social
system of Oceania it is as with the dialects — the
ancient mother system has been lost. Had we that lost
system in its completeness before us, the task would
be comparatively easy to piece together the modem
isolated fragments. And if we look for the ancient
system, religious and social, of the Semitic-speaking
peoples we can only obtain glimpses of it : how ex-
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
180 OCEANIA.
tremely little, for instance, can we learn from history
about the system of the ancient Phoenicians, and how
it differed from that of the other ancient Semitic-
speaking tribes. Then, again, in Madagascar, the
modem and mediaeval Arabs, and in Malaysia the
peoples of India, and more recently the Mahommedan
Arabs, have exercised a great influence ; and one might
easily regard some idea or custom there as ancient
while in reality it might be due in whole or in part to
these influences. This is true to a less extent of the
Maori-Hawaiian speakers, for they have been, as is
generally believed, cut off from all such influences for
from 1,000 to 1,800 years. And it is least of all true
of such people as those in the New Hebrides, whose
position, whose comparatively greater degradation (or
savagery), and the greater multitude and diversity of
whose dialects all go to show that they have been
longest of all cut off from the civilized world and
from outside influences. No Sanscrit words, so far as
known, are found there, as in Malay, and no ruins of
Indian temples, as in Java. I shall, therefore, take
the Efatese as being a more unmixed representative
of the ancient Oceanic mother system, so far as it goes,
than any of the others named. Baal worship was
certainly a striking feature of that ancient system, or
of the ancient pagan Semitic-speaking world, and I
have not found any such traces of it in Madagascar,
Java, or Samoa as in Efate. But, probably, such
traces do exist in Malaysia and Madagascar.
Another feature of the ancient world was the pre*
Digitized by VjOO^I^ .
THE OCEANIC FAMILY AND RELATIONSHIP. 181
valence of the idea of ceremonial and sexual unclean-
ness, and the practice of religious purification. In
Ef. there is a word used to denote this uncleanness.
MiTYh or mam (perhaps radically denoting softness or
laxity), with article namim ; and this namim, was
supposed to be contracted in various emergencies, and
was especially avoided by the sacred men, as it
destroyed their sacredness. There was the namim
namxitien (of death), n, naUselan (of childbirth).
Thus, if a sacred man even passed a village where a
death had occurred, or a house where a child had
been born, he would immediately take steps to cleanse
himself. This he did by a religious ceremony. A
cocoanut was split open and a prayer or incantation
said over it, and its water then sprinkled or poured
over him and his companions. Another mode of
purification was to break a forked branch from a
particular plant, and, after the necessary prayer or
incantation, to draw the branch down the body and
limbs, sweeping away the defilement. In Mg. occurs
the word afana, the sprinkling with water consecrated
by the idols to preserve from disease.
The crime of "incest" was punished with death by
the Efatese. Supposing the criminal a man too
powerful, or having too many supporters to be openly
punished, he would be led into some trap and
destroyed. The relationship system oi the Efatese
I have found difficult to understand ; but it is a
thoroughly well-defined system, simple to the natives.
The people are all divided into families or clans, each
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
182 OCEANIA.
of which has a distinctive name, such as naniu the
cocoanut, namkatu (the favourite of Seiitau) a species
of yam, Tidui the yam, &c. The woman is the mother
of the clan — that is, every child, male and female,
belongs to the family of the mother. It would be
incest for any man or woman to marry a person
belonging to his or her family or clan, as for a nomi
to marry a nauiy though they may have no recent
relation of consanguinity to each other, and though
neither they nor their parents may have even seen
each other before. Sons-in-law and fathers and
mothers-in-law avoid and will not touch each other,
the mother-in-law covering her head so as not to be
seen. The people give as the reason or a reason of
this that if they should touch each other they wiDuld
" become poor," but this would seem to be rather as a
punishment for the supposed wickedness of the deed.
What can be the reason of this idea ? It is found
among other peoples, and if we could ascertain the
reason for it among the Efatese it might help us in
other cases. Now, among the Efatese incest is con-
sidered a dreadful wickedness; and a wife when
married is purchased, and so becomes the property of
the purchaser. She thus passes over to her husband's
family (or clan). If her husband dies his brother
may marry her, or his family dispose of her in
marriage. Her father or mother would have no say
in the matter unless, with the consent of her husband's
family, they refunded what had been paid for her in
the first instance to them. I cannot see, however.
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
THE OCEANIC FAMILY AND RELATIONSHIP. 183
that this could have given rise to the idea that it was
wicked for a man to touch his father or mother-in-
law, or how that touching could by any natural pro-
cess lead to poverty. If we hold that the poverty
was considered as a punishment from the gods — and
this is certainly how the present Efatese regard it —
then we must believe, so far as I can see, that the sup-
posed wickedness was connected in their minds with
those ideas which lay at the foundation of their extreme
abhorrence of incest and of sexual uncleanness. The
same ideas operated also, e.g., in Fiji, to keep brothers
and sisters from even speaking to each other. These
call each other gari^ in Fiji, gore in Ef . ; those who in
Ef. call each other gore, brothers' sisters and sisters'
brothers, are children of the same mother, and
considered as very closely related on that account.
Incest between such would be certainly punished
with death. And I believe that the same ideas
operate in all these cases as a barrier between sons
and daughters of the same mother and a man and
his wife's mother, and all males and females of the
same family, who all called each other gore — that is,
children of the same ancestral mother, as they, of
course, are. That mother was the source of the
family, and the prohibition that was just and right,
as applied to her immediate offspring, continued to
all generations of those descended from her, who of
course bore her name, and hence is now in force (as
we consider unnaturally) among those who have no
connection with each other but that distant one in
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
184 OCEANIA.
the past When the Efatese are converted, so deeply
has this system taken hold of them, it is difficult to
get them to ignore that part of it which is not
sanctioned by an enlightened Christianity, though it
may be purely restrictive. All this hinges on the
idea that children of the same mother are much more
closely related to each other than children of the
same father but of different mothers. The anthro-
pologists have spent much curious ingenuity, and
uttered with great confidence mere conjectures, on
this subject. But it is evident that the same idea
pervaded the ancient Semitic-speaking world. And
it is an idea perfectly natural among a polygamous
people.
It is also naturally connected with this, as we find
it among the Efatese and other Oceanians, and owing
to the family instinct, or loyal affection to what is
regarded as the family, that the child should look
upon the mother's gore (maternal uncle) as the head
of the family (called in Ef. aloa, or loa, dialect 6ai6
— see above word head, Mg. loJia, &c.), and that
this uncle should look upon his sister's child as
the hope of his house or future head of his family.
They all bear the same name, and are really all sprung
from the same ancestress. What we fail to realize is
that they absolutely confound the family with the
tribe or clan, and that they apply the rules of the
family of children of one mother to the tribe, no
matter of how many households it consists, who are
directly descended from that original mother. It is
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
THE OCEANIC FAMILY AND RELATIONSHIP. 185
this extension of the ideas of the family (in one sense)
to the tribe (in the sense explained) that makes it so
difficult for us to understand their system, and for
them to understand our system of relationship. Yet
their system, when thus considered, is simplicity
itself. Thus let us take an example of a family or
tribe — say that of Naui, and call it a. The people of
a originally consisted of one woman, who might have
been called Nam ; then of her and her children, all
of whom, males and females, addressed each other
thus — males and males, or females and females, as hcflu,
or tai (literally, friend, helper, associate), and males
and females as gore, a name implying the prohibition
of, and certain laws of intercourse restrictive and
designed to guard against, incest. As these male
children had to marry females of another family, their
children did not belong to the family of a, but to that
of their wives, h; but the children of their grore, whose
fathers were 6, belonged to a. Thus the children of
their gore belonged to their family (a), while their own
belonged to another family (6), and if a man wished
to keep his honours and his wealth from passing over
to another family or tribe, he must make his gore's
child his successor and heir. Of course, the same law
that led him to pass over his own child led also the
man of h to do the same ; and thus, while he made
another man's, the other man might make his,
child successor and heir in the same way. Now, this
system having been set agoing, just as all the persons
of a in the first, second, and third generations were
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
186 OCEANIA.
called a, and all brothers and sisters, and their mothers
and grandmothers, so in the fiftieth generation, no
matter how numerous, they are all a in the same way.
When a man of a married a woman of 6, he called her
father and mother, and all the females of b parents-
in-law (naburuma or tyio), and he and they all avoided
each other; and he called all the males of b brothers-
in-law (tauien). That is, each tribe is regarded as
one family, united as one person. A child of a calls
her own mother mother, and all her mother's tribe
sisters mother ; and calls by the name of father not
only her own father but all his tribe brothers ; and
they all call the child their child.
Thus the family came first, and when it extended
into a clan, the clan was still considered as only a
family. The mother was considered the link which
bound the family together, or rather as the source
from which the family sprang. There is not the
slightest ground for imagining any previous state of
brutish barbarism or "communal" marriage as
necessary to account for the Oceanic system just
described. The marrying of a widow by her brother-
in-law was consonant with this system, as it was with
the system that prevailed in the ancient Semitic-
speaking wcrld. The Oceanic abhorrence of incest
above described is paralleled by what prevailed in
the ancient world ; and we may believe that in the
Oceanic system that prevailed in the earliest times
there was the utmost horror of incest as between
children of the same mother or family, while
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
THE OCEANIC FAMILY AND RELATIONSHIP. 187
different ideas prevailed as to children of the same
father but of different mothers ; and that it was the
recognized right and duty of a brother to marry his
deceased brother's widow. Among the Efatese the
above system certainly tended to loosen the tie
between a father and his children, but did not
necessarily do so ; and it is remarkable that while all
children belonged, by the family name, to the mother's
family, each child had its own name, and any one
hearing the name at once knew the father's family
thereby. Thus, for instance, all children whose
fathers were of the family of a had kom prefixed to
their names, all whose fathers belonged to 6 had turi
prefixed, and whenever you know the prefix to any
one's individual name you know to what family his
father belongs. Tamate — '•' peace," and Naru — " war,"
are common names among the Efatese, and when you
hear people called Turi tamate, or Twri naru (born
in peace or during war), you know that their fathers
belong to the family or clan called Naui ; while
Kom tamate, or Kom nam, are people whose fathers
belong to the family or clan called Karau, and so the
name of every child bom in Efate is significant.
While the child belongs to the mother's family, its
name does not show this.
In Efate, people usually address each ofcher, not by
their proper names, but by names indicating relation-
ship, as father, brother, sister, brother-in-law, &c. ;
and as, according to the system explained, the whole
of a clan is considered as one family, or almost as one
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
188 OCEANIA.
person, a man may call 50 or 100 persons — some of
whom are mere children — " father," and by the name
of "parent-in-law" not only his wife's mother, but
all the women of her tribe, and not only his wife's
father, but his wife, and all the men of the father's
clan and their wives. To ascertain whether a man
called " father" is really the man s father, you have
to ask if this is the father who begot him ; and in
the same way to ascertain if the woman called
mother is really his mother, you have to ask if this
is the mother that bore him: so with those called
brothers or sisters and children. Now, I submit that
the explanation given above is satisfactory, and
accounts for all the facts, and that it is altogether
gratuitous to assume or conjecture the existence of a
disgusting primaeval state of "communal marriage"
or beastliness as the explanation of it. By that
hypothesis the abhorrence of incest, which is so
fundamental a feature of the Efatese system, cannot
be accounted for. Another hypothesis which imagines
that a child calls all the males of his father's clan
" father " because in the supposed brute-human epoch
he did not know which of the communal herd was
his father, breaks down at once when applied to the
other, the mother's side : for the child equally called
all the females of his mother's clan " mother," and
this certainly could not have arisen from any doubt
as to the actual mother that bore him. Sir John
Lubbock imagines that after this supposed brutal
herding system arose marriage by capture, and that
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
THE OCEANIC FAMILY AND RELATIONSHIP. 189
this system of capture accounts for the restriction of
intercourse between a mother-in-law and her son-
in-law. Now, in the first place, the "capture"
hypothesis, like the human-brute communal hjrpo-
thesis, is a mere imagination ; that such systems
prevailed in the early stages of the history of man-
kind is no more capable of proof than that the first
ancestors, or fathers and mothers, of men were
Darwin's " hairy quadrupeds" of " arboreal habits."
But among the Efatese the ancient ideas of sexual
impurity, as a thing abhorred and punished by the
gods, and ceremonially contracted even by mere
contact with a prohibited or unclean person or thing,
and of incest as undoubtedly worthy of death, jet
prevail, and sufficiently account for tl^is practice,
which is similar to that of the Fiji gane (Ef. gore) —
restriction of intercourse. Now, Sir J. Lubbock's
explanation entirely breaks down when applied to
this latter, for here the persons on whom the
law of restriction operates are endeared to each
other by the closest ties of family affection and
relationship, being children of the same mother.
Moreover, the idea that there is any ill-will between
the persons, whether gore or sons and parents-in-
law, is entirely erroneous ; on the contrary, in Efate
there is the utmost friendliness and good-will. The
restrictive system was in its origin a barrier erected
to prevent pollution or incest, by which Divine judg-
ment would be brought upon the land ; and this, also,
is why a man is put to death for incest. The prac-
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
190 OCEANIA.
tice remains when the savages who practise it, as
handed down from their forefathers, can no longer give
a rational explanation of it. But I believe the Efatese
know in general that the meaning here given is the
real meaning of these restrictions and practices. Sir
John Lubbock has devoted a large part of his work
(" Origin of Civilization and Primitive Condition of
Man ") — in fact, about one-third of it — to this subject.
It is true that most of his book is merely quotations
from all and sundry. The following passage is of
interest : — "In Australia (he says) among the
aborigines of Victoria it is compulsory on the mothers-
in-law to avoid the sight of their sons-in-law, by
making the mothers-in-law take a very circuitous
route on all. occasions to avoid being seen, and they
hide the face and figure with the rug which the
female carries about her. So strict is this rule
that if married men are jealous of anyone they
sometimes promise to give him a daughter in
marriage. This places the wife, according to custom,
in the position of a mother-in-law, and renders
any communication between her and her future son-
in-law a capital crime." Now, although I cannot
speak with the same confidence of the Victorian
aborigines as of the Efatese, much less jump from
Africa to Kamschatka, thence bounding to Peru
and Fiji or Teheran, after the fashion of some of
our modem anthropologists, in search (from their
studies in London) of quotations in support of their
theories, yet I think it plain that the facts as stated
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
THE OCEANIC FAMILY AND RELATIONSHIP. 191
in the above passage are certainly not explicable on
Sir John Lubbock's theory, and entirely explicable in
the manner I have indicated.
As to the prohibition of intermarriage between
males and females of the same clan in Efate, the
reason I have given is certainly the correct one. The
reason is that such marriage would be considered, and
at first when the institution was founded rightly
considered, incestuous ; these males and females being
children of the same mother. Hence the explanation
attempted by Sir John Lubbock that this so-called
" exogamous " system (in the case of vague ideas,
ignorance, or doubt, nothing is more frequent than the
use of resounding words) arose from the supposed
more primitive system of marriage by capture that
created the imaginary hostility (which is not a hostility
at all, in Efate at least, but a restriction of intercourse
between persons united by the closest bonds of affection
and kindred) between sons-in-law and mothers-in-law,
is altogether unnecessary and inept. I am happy to
agree with Sir John Lubbock, however, in the opinion
which he thus expresses : — " The system of Levirate,
under which, at a man's death, his wife or his wives
pass to his .brother is, I think, more intimately
connected with the rights of property than with
polyandry." He further says : — " Among the ancient
Jews Abraham married his half-sister, Nahor married
Tiis brother's daughter, and Amram his father's sister.
This was permitted, because they were not regarded
as relations. Tamar, also, evidentl}'^ might have
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
192 OCEANIA.
married Amnon, though they were both children of
David. * Speak unto the king/ she said, * for he will
not withhold me from thee ;' for, as their mothers
were not the same, they were no relations in the eye
of the law." I give this latter passage merely to show
that there is reason to believe, apart from and along
with what we find in Oceania, that in the ancient
Semitic-speaking world (as, probably, in the ancient
world very generally) children of the same mother
were considered as more closely related than children
of the same father but of different mothers.
What was the pi^imitive relationship, or family
system, among mankind ? Was it more like our
system, in which children are considered equally
related to the father and mother, or to the system
described, in which they are considered as more closely
related to the mother? Sir John Lubbock thinks
that our system is comparatively modem, and a
development from the other ; but then his opinion is
founded on the ideas above shown to be erroneous.
On the contrary, I think that the system in which
children are considered as more closely related to the
mother, so that she, with her children, constitute the
family or clan, to the exclusion of the father, is a
modification, by degradation, however slight, of the
primitive family system, in which, I suppose, the
father and mother and their children constituted the
family very much as with us ; and that what broke
up the primitive family system (which was mono-
gamous) was polygamy, which weakened the tie
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
THE OCEANIC FAMILY AND KELATIONSHIP. 193
between husband and wife, and broke up the one
family into as many families as there were wives who
had children. It was no longer possible for the father
to be a member of each of these families in the sense
in which he was a member of the primitive family, or
for children of these separate families, or of different
mothers, to be regarded as so closely related to each
other as those who were children of the primitive
family or of the same mother. Our system — ^the
monogamous system of Christendom — is not a develop-
ment from the polygamous system, but a continuation
of, or, under the light of divine truth and law and
enlightened reason, a reverting to the primitive
system ; and, therefore, more ancient than the poly-
gamous system. Of course, the corrupt system, though
it had a polygamous origin, might exist afterwards in
a particular tribe in which monogamy prevailed, just
as in particular monogamous households in a poly-
gamous country. A statement like this may come
like a cold douche upon the fiery enthusiasm of . the
advocates of the theory of the ancestral ''hairy
quadruped/' and one may expect them to cry out
against it ; but I cannot but say that it is in accord,
and that their theory is not in accord, as I have
endeavoured, as I believe successfully, to show, with
the available facts of existing human life and human
history.
The family lies at the very foundation of human
society and civilization, and a corrupt family system
s one of the greatest obstacles to the progress of
U
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
194 OCEANIA.
Christianity in the world — ^that is, to the ppogi*ess and
well-being of mankind. It is a distinguishing glory
of the Christian religion that it seeks to set the
family on a sound basis, and that it sternly opposes
the great corruption of the family — polygamy, and
every other corruption that tends to weaken the tie
between husband and wife, or both, and their children.
It is a part of the corrupt system that women are
degraded, and that they bxq purdiased, and so regarded
as a kind of slaves, or as representing so much pro-
perty. This system of wife purchase prevailed in the
ancient Semitic-speaking world and among the modem
Arabs, as well as among the Oceanians. Marriage
being thus, in part, a commercial transaction, divorce
is easy and frequent, and affection or love often
altogether absent. I will venture to say that the base
and corrupting system of polygamy is as prevalent
to-day among the Arabic tribes as in Oceania, that
woman is as degraded, that divorce is as frequent, and
that, in many respects, the Oceanian system will
compare not unfavourably with that of some Arab
tribes, though the latter live in the immediate vicinity
of the civilized world. 'One of the most striking
proofs of the supposed licentiousness of some Oceanic
tribes is the practice of lending guests the wives of
the hosts, but even this practice is in vogue among
more than one Arab tribe ; and it must be remem-
bered that this practice is not universal or common
among the Oceanians, and that, generally, they are
jealous of the chastity of their wives and the honour
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
THE OCEANIC FAMILY AND KELATIONSHIP. 195
of their daughters, and treat women respectfully an'd
kindly. They do not cage up their wives in the
brutal manner of the Arabian system, and they do
not speak of them in the brutally contemptuous
manner common among the Arabs, even in the
renowned, but unhappy, land of Palestine,
Travellers and writers often speak of savages, their
manners, and customs in a very misleading way, and
erroneous views, therefore, are apt to prevail among
Europeans. The very name "savage" is apt to mis-
lead. What is a "savage?" The Efatese are
"savages." What does this imply? Now, it does
not imply that they are ferocious in their manners.
They are mild and gentle in speech and manner.
They are most polite in their intercourse with each
other. They are hospitable and generous. They live
according to strict laws and customs handed down
to them from their forefathers. In their way, or
according to their lights, they are pious and religious.
They live in the presence of the supernatural. They
are a sensible people. They treat their children
kindly, and are shocked to see Europeans correcting
their children; I never saw an Efatese beating a
child. But, on the other hand, they are cannibals,
addicted to witchcraft, and infanticide, and licentious-
ness, and to treachery in war, and apt, or used to be
apt, to kill castaways from ships or canoes. Now,
when a European, in giving an account of such
savages, merely dwells upon such practices as canni-
balism, infanticide, the burying alive in certain
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
196 OCEANU.
circumstances of the aged, the hopelessly sick, or the
insane — the picture is true, it may be, so far as it
goes, but it is one-sided. It is horrid, and there is no
excuse for such practices. But it has to be remem*
bered that there were " wreckers" not so long ago in
Cornwall, and that people were burned alive not so
long ago for witchcraft in England and America, and
that infanticide and licentiousness can be found
nearer home than the South Sea Islands ; and that in
England, in the present day, there are advocates of
the practice of putting to death the aged and the
hopelessly diseased. The degradation of some of the
back slums of the great cities of Christendom, and
the brutality and licentiousness of them, are more
shocking than that of the savages. Of course there
are wicked men among the savages, according to
their own standard, just as among us according to
ours. But wickedness of this kind is different from
the wickedness that is sanctioned by public opinion,
and not considered as blameworthy — such, for
instance, as the worship of idols, and cannibalism, or
polygamy. Even cannibalism is sometimes practised
by Europeans, as by castaways at sea; and it is
not improbable that the practice arose among the
Oceanians in this way, or in times of great famine.
We read of an ancient Jewish mother eating her own
child in the extremity of famine; and I am well
assured that in Oceania the practice has often
arisen from a similar cause. And many, by far the
majority, of the Oceanians are as free from this prac-
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
THE OCEANIC FAMILY AND RELATIONSHIP. 197
iice as we are. On the other hand, though the
horrid practice may have originated in this way, it
would seem that some tribes became habituated to it,
and acquired a taste for human flesh, and that among
some it became a regular practice to eat the bodies of
enemies killed in war, or of criminals put to death
for crime. Taking a general view of Oceania, one
cannot hesitate to conclude that cannibalism is not a
practice which universally prevailed in ancient times,
and which the majority of the race in the coui*se of
development have left behind, but one, on the
contrary, into which the minority of the race have by
degradation sunk in comparatively recent times.
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
CHAPTER XVni.
Religion, Mokality, and Law Among the
Oceanians.
The religion of a people takes its character from the
nature of the object or objects of worship, or from the
character of the conception of deity which is enter-
tained. The Efatese are among the lowest of the
Oceanians, and it may be of interest from more than one
point of view to carefully consider what their religion
really was. Their deities were spiritual beings, and if
they worshipped stones or other objects it was not the
stones, &c., that they worshipped, but the spiritual
beings residing in or supposed to be connected in
some way with them. Thus, even these mere stones,
as we see them to be, were called by the Efatese
" sacred stones," or " sacred spirits." The gods of the
Efatese were called by the general name of ifiatemate,
spirits of the dead — that is, of dead men ; yet these
spirits were supposed to have and to exercise super-
natural and divine powers, as giving plentiful seasons
and years of famine, as delivering from death or
causing to die, as giving prosperity or the reverse, as
giving victory in war or defeat, as acting, indeed, at
every point along the whole course of human experi-
ence from the cradle to the grave. Prayers were
— ^ Digitized by VjOOQ IC
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
RELIGION, MORALITY, AND LAW. 201
offered to them, and thanksgivings. Sacrifices were
rendered to them. Vows were made to them. Almost
every calamity that came upon a man was supposed
to come from them as a punishment for some offence.
When the Efatese become Christian they continue the
same way of thinking, and have constantly to be
corrected for attributing every calamity of a man to
some particular sin, like those Jews who supposed
the tower of Siloam fell upon certain persons and
killed them because they were the greatest sinners in
Jerusalem. Here are a people among the lowest
cannibal savages in the world who are nevertheless a
very 'religious people, for whom the whole world is
filled with innumerable spiritual beings that walk
unseen, to offend whom is calamity and death, to
please whom is life ; to expiate their offences to whom
they habitually sacrifice without a murmur the most
valuable property they possess, and in the effort to
please whom they sometimes abstain for long periods
from the things they most desire, and in the worship
of whom they exercise more forethought, and do more
work, and spend more property (or what is equivalent
to our money) than in any other matter whatever.
There is no people under the sun more obedient to
what they regard as the mandates of deity than
these " savages.''
It is often said that the Oceanian savage has no
idea of a good deity, but this is entirely erroneous, in
the sense in which it is intended. There are, indeed,
among the spirits feared by the Efatese, some who,
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
202 OCEANU.
perhaps, are purely destructive ; but the prevailing
notion of a natemate is that of a being who, in respect
to moral character, is in no way diflTerent from a man,
and who is, therefore, an object of love as well as of
fear. Most of the natemate who ar6' worshipped by
the people of each village are the deified spirits of
their recently deceased relatives. That they should
clothe these beings with the attributes of divine
power is fully accounted for in the way above indi-
cated, and can be accounted for rationally, so far as I
can see, in no other way. The people have practically
lost the knowledge of the Supreme Being which their
ancestors — the Oceanic fathers — possessed, along with
a superstitious reverence for, amounting to worship
of, the dead. As the knowledge and the name of God
gradually disappeared, the ideas associated with that
name became gradually transferred to the prevailing
objects of worship. Hence these objects of worship,
while considered as, in some respects, in a worse con-
dition than men, living in a hades or sheol that, in
true ancient Semitic fashion, is regarded as a poor
place as compared with this world, and being, accord-
ing to the ideas of the ancient heathen world, mere
shades, and therefore objects of pity to their surviving
relatives, and depending upon their piety for the
supply of their wants, in other respects, and with an
inconsistency natural only according to the explanation
given, they are regarded as clothed with all the divine
powers in existence, and regulating, according to their
will, the operations of nature and the events of human
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
RELIGION, MORALITY, AND LAW. 203
experience, and as, in fact, omniscient and omnipotent,
according to the current ideas of such attributes.
Practically, no higher beings are known than the
natemate ; for even such of their deities as Wot and
the mythological beings who figure in the story of
the creation of the world, as Maui tikitiki, are called
natemate, although, perhaps, originally they were not
considered as the spirits of dead men. There was
among the Bomans and Greeks, and perhaps generally
in the ancient heathen world, a similar confounding
of the divine with the human ; and some have thought
that the divinities of the Romans — including Jupiter
— were the spirits of dead men. But if they were
they had been turned into gods by having the attri-
butes of divinity given to them by the ignorance
and blindness of heathenism. With respect to the
Oceanian or Efatese savage, the transition from the
ancient state to the present was easy. In the ancient
state the name and attributes of the Supreme Beiog
were known, but nearly the whole of the religious
activity of the people was absorbed in the worship of
idols and at the tombs of dead men. Gradually the
latter increased at the expense of the former, until
the present state was reached in such places as Efate.
How natural such a lapse is to Semitic-speakiDg
heathen is plain from their history. In ancient times
their tendency was constant to forget God for the
worship of idols. There is really no great difference,
or only such difference as is perfectly natural, between
the heathenism of Oceania and that of the ancient
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
204 OCEANIA.
world. The Oceanic temple is ihe tomb, the Oceanic
deity is the spirit of the man whose body lies within
that tomb. In Madagascar, where they have a name
for the Supreme Being that literally signifies
" the Lord that caused to exist," or " created," *' the
veneration they have for the memory of their ances-
tors, and the assurance they have of their spirits
always existing, are apparent in almost every circum-
stance of the few religious ceremonies they perform ; "
and ''frightful consequences, in the opinion of the
heathen part of the population, would follow any
desecration or disrespect shown to their graves" (Sibree
and Drury). "Among many customs," says Crau-
furd, in his History of the Eastern Archipelago,
" common to the Indian islanders, there is none more
universal than the veneration for the tombs of ances-
tors." Burckhardt mentions that every Arab village
has its sacred tomb, which is venerated, and where
worship is preferred. The greatest sin of Israel, and
of the world, wa^ and is" says Dr. Thomson, " apostasy
from the true God and His worship by idolatry ; and
the most prevalent mode of this apostasy is sacrilegious
reverence for dead men's tombs and bones. Every
village (in Palestine) has its saints' tombs, every hill-
top is crowned with the white dome of some neby or
prophet. Thither all resort to garnish the sepulchre,
bum incense and consecrated candles, fulfil vows,
make offerings, and pray. So fanatical are they in
their zeal that they would tear any man to pieces
who should put dishonour upon these sacred shrines.
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
RELIGION, MORALITY, AND LAW. 205
. . . Now, here, in Jerusalem, should the Saviour
re-appear, and condemn with the same severity our
modem Pharisees, they would hill Him upon His own
reputed tomb, . . . You may blaspheme the
Godhead, through all the Divine Persons, offices,
and attributes in safety ; but insult these dead men's
shrines, and woe be to you." The ideas that are thus
manifested are substantially the same as are mani-
fested in the Efatese natemate worship, in the Maraea
of the central Pacific, and in the mysterious structures
of Easter Island, The ancient pagan Arabs sacrificed
some animal at a grave on occasion of a burial, as a
cow, camel, sheep, or goat. The Arabs of Socotra,
now, slay cattle at a death exactly as the Efatese slay
pigs (which are their cattle), and the Malagasy cattle.
The Arabs believed, as the Efatese do, that the spirit
of the animal accompanied the spirit of the deceased
to the spiritual world; by sacrificing these animals,
they showed their affectionate care for the welfare of
the dead in the future world. " On the day of the
Korban, the great sacrifice on Mount Arafat, each
Arab family kills as many camels as there have been
deaths of adult persons during the last year in that
family, whether the deceased were males or females.
Though a dead person should have bequeathed but
one camel to his heir, that camel is sacrificed ; and if
he did not leave one, his relations kill one of their
own camels. Seven sheep may be substituted for a
camel, and if the whole number cannot be procured
for the Korban of the death-year, the deficiency may
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
206 OCEANIA.
be supplied by killing some on the next or subsequent
year. The Korban is, therefore, always a day of
great feasting among the tribes." At every village of
the Efatese there is a periodical festival of a similar
kind held, and animals slain for every person who
has died since the preceding festival.
An Efatese is bound, above all things, to see to this
matter. A family will labour patiently for one or
two years preparing for these festivals. The animals
slain, and all the accompanying rites, are supposed to
be necessary to the well-being of the spirits of the
deceased relatives, and a man who should refuse or
neglect to perform the rites and slay the animals
would be branded as infamous, as irreligious, as
atheistical, and as wanting in gratitude and natural
affection. He would be punished by social ostracism,
and his life would be made miserable by his fellow
men. And he would be in imminent danger of
destruction from the gods — that is, the natemate.
When any particular neglect is, perhaps, inadvertently
perpetrated, and the perpetrator falls sick, or his
house is burned, or some other calamity overtakes
him, the " sacred man " is called in, and inquires of
the natemate what the cause is ; any neglect of the
kind mentioned, if it exists, is sure to be pointed out
as the cause, and the neglector is instructed to make
expiation (by sacrifice), and to at once set about doing
what he had neglected to do. There are, of course,
other causes of sickness and calamity. The windings
of superstition are many. Sometimes the evil demons
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
RELIGION, MORALITY, AND LAW. 207
afflict a man just because they are evil ; they are con-
X5eived of as lurking in the woods and streams, and
are feared as we would fear wild beasts. And some-
times a man is the victim of witchcraft or sorcery.
But generally the causes are considered to be some
failure of duty with respect to the natemate. A very
curious question has been much discussed, as to what
bearing the religion of savages has upon morals.
Now the religion of savages, as seen in Efate, has
apparently little or no bearing upon morals in our
sense of the expression; but it has a tremendous
bearing upon the lives of the people in accordance
with its character, just as Christianity has upon our
lives in accordance with its character. The duties
imposed upon them by their religion are sacred duties,
and the performance of these duties is the condition
on which they hold the right to prosperity, to pro-
perty, and to life. When a man fails in his duty by
omission or commission, and some punishment over-
takes him, he and all his neighbours at once acquiesce
in the justice of the punishment. The idea of duty
depends upon the idea of deity. In case of doubt as
to the path of duty the " sacred man" (and there is one
or more " sacred men " at each village) makes inquiry
of the natemate. But the natemate, being as to moral
character exactly like themselves, can, of course,
require no higher morality from their worshippers
than they themselves possess. Hence the worship
of these natemate cannot elevate, morally, the
worshipper. Thus it in no way condemns canni-
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
208 OCEANIA.
balism, or infanticide, or the burying alive of the
extremely aged, who often ask to be buried alive — a
practice in vogue also among the Arabs of Socotra.
But it certainly has some moral effect. Thus
if a man is tempted to commit murder secretly^ or
theft, he has the fear that when the friends of the
murdered man, or the person from whom he has
stolen, ask the "sacred man" to inquire of the nate*
mate to discover the criminal, they may reveal his
wickedness, or they may directly punish him ; or, if
he be guilty of adultery, he is ever in danger of being*
found out — these, and such like things, being con-
demned both by gods and men. Sickness, coming'
after such crimes, is usually regarded as a punish-
ment, and often the guilty confesses, when sick, to a
crime which would not otherwise be discovered. But
the natemate are regarded as being more ready to punish
for failure in duties that have respect to themselves,,
and that are more religious than moral, though even
in these there is a moral and humanizing element.
Thus, if cocoanuts are tabooed, or consecrated to the
worship of the natemate at some forthcoming
festival, to steal these would be regarded as a much
greater offence than common stealing. The great nate-
mate festivals were called by the Efatese "Peace,'*
and villages at war with each other used to meet
together at these festivals. Hence the common saying
among those at war — " Such a festival is abokas (i,e.,
hades) ; let us assemble together at it." For all people,
no matter how hostile to each other in this world.
Digitized by VjOO^I^
RELIGION, MORALITY, AND LAW. 209
^
were supposed to assemble and dwell together in the
future world. All rewards and punishments were
supposed to be received in this world. Hades, or
sheol, was one and undivided ; but yet a man's con-
J dition in the future would be, to some extent, happy
^' or miserable according to his life here. Supposing
^ he were a worthless fellow, very scanty worship
*^ would be rendered to him at his death and few
animals slain to accompany him to the spirit world ;
and thus he would occupy an inferior position there
corresponding to his social worthlessness here. This
belief had undoubtedly great influence in making
men strive to live so as to obtain the good opinion of
their fellows, and leave an honourable memory behind
them at death ; but the stream cannot rise above the
source, and if the moral influence of the religion of
the Ef atese savages was not great, it is simply because
their religion was of the low character described---very
different, indeed, from the Christian religion, but not
so very different from that of the ancient (and modem)
Semitic-speaking pagans, whether we look at the
character of the object of worship or the influence of
that worship upon the moral character of the wor-
shipper. The abhorrence of incest — formerly referred
to — is certainly of religious origin, its origin dating
back to a time when a better state of things prevailed.
The Oceanian account of the drawing up of the islands
from the sea is, I believe, a fragment of the account
of the creation of the world current among the fore-
fa'thers of the Oceanic race before they passed from
15
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
210 OCEANU.
Asia to the islands. The Efatese belief that the soul
is examined at the entrance of hades by the dreadful
Seritau, and, failing to give satisfaction, h&s its tongue
cut out and its head split open, and its head twisted
backside foremost, is, I believe, a version of the story
current among the Arabs of the soul being examined
by angels at the entrance of hades, and its being
beaten on the temples by them when dissatisfied with
its answers. The Efatese ideas that the sky was
solid, that there were seven heavens, one above the
other, and six or seven hades, one below the other, are
paralleled by the similar ancient Semitic ideas.
According to Mahomet, the seventh, or lowest depart-
ment of hades, was reserved for the hypocrites.
According to Hale, in the Tarawan gi*oup, only those
tattooed can reach *' paradise ;'' and in the Sandwich
Islands, '' in former times, persons frequently had
themselves tattooed as a token of mourning at the
death of a friend or chief." A fragment of the former
is found among the Efatese, in the belief that one can
pass Seritau unharmed into hades by presenting to
him some tattoo marks ; and the latter was practised
among a part of the Efatese till quite recently, when
they embraced Christianity. It is known that such
tattooing for the dead was a practice among the ancient
Semitic-speaking heathen.
A fair consideration of the facts that meet us in
examining the religious system of the Oceanic
speakers leads to the conclusion that it is a corruption
of the system of their forefathers, whose system
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
RELIGION, MORALITY, AND LAW. 211
itself was a corruption of the primitive religion in
which there was but one object of worship, the
Supreme Being, Creator of the world and of man.
According to that primitive religion, man was made
in the image of God. According to this corruption
of a corruption of that religion, man — or rather
the spirit of a dead man alone — is God, and there
are as many gods as there are spirits of dead
men. So tremendous a revolution as this could
not have been brought about suddenly, or as a
solitary phenomenon ; it was gradually accomplished
during thousands of years, and accompanied at
every step by corresponding changes at every
point along the whole line of human thought
and activity. It is only in certain atmospheres
that certain plants will take root and flourish:
only in such a poisoned atmosphere as this could such
monstrous insanity as the putting of these ghosts in
the seat of the Supreme prevail. In such an atmos-
phere of darkness such horrors as cannibalism were
unblushingly perpetrated. Yet even among these
savages, after all these ages of isolation from the
civilized world and from all outside influences of
an elevating tendency, there were found abundant
proofs of that primitive truth that man had been
created in the image of God ; and when the primitive
religion of the human race came to them in the shape
of Christianity, the Sun of Kighteousness rising and
shining with healing in His wings upon them in their
dark prison-house of ghost worship and cannibalism.
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
212 OCEANIA.
how truly was once more that ancient prophecy
fulfilled—
'< The people which sat in darkness
Saw a great light,
And to them which sat in the region and shadow of death,
To them did light spring up."
And how truly may it be said of such of them as
have embraced Christianity, that they are "now,"
after millenniums of unparalleled wanderings over
trackless seas, the world's great ocean wildernesses,
"RETURNED unto the Shepherd and Bishop of
their souls."
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
CHAPTER XIX.
Ancient History and Oceanic Tradition.
There is not much to be obtained from these sources,
but what little there is is entirely in accord with the
evidence already adduced to show that the fathers of
the Oceanic-speaking race came in ships into the islands
from Arabia or neighbourhood from three to four
thousand years ago. I believe that there is not very
much difference in the state of society among the
better part of the Oceanians in the present day after
all that lapse of time, and that they are very much
in the same stage of civilization as their fathers were
4,000 years ago. If anything, they are on the whole
slightly lower. But they are, and always have been,
a part of the " unchanging East." No doubt many
portions of the race in the more outlying parts have
sunk considerably, though even they have not sunk
so much as we might have expected. If some of the
Oceanians have lost such arts as pottery-making,
cloth-weaving, and writing, others seem to have
invented the outrigger canoe, and the making of a
kind of cloth out of the bark of trees. The cultiva-
tion of the soil or of plants, and keeping of domestic
animals, extend throughout the history and the
branches of the race, while we cannot wonder at the
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
214 OCEANIA.
absence of cattle in the more outlying islands. The
race is fundamentally possessed with the trading and
navigating instinct, and I have no doubt that it was
that instinct that led their fathers into the island
world. According to the earliest intimations of
history the Semitic-speaking race were distinguished
by the possession of that instinct from the most
ancient times, and it led them to operate ^r«^ in the
Persian Qulf and Indian Ocean (African and Asiatic
coast), and afterwards in the Mediterranean.
The Phoenicians are sufficiently renowned. The
first ocean-going voyage recorded by history was the
trading voyage in the Indian Ocean of Solomon and
Hiram. Not less renowned than the Phoenicians in
the Mediterranean were the Chaldeans and Sabseans,
or South Arabians, or Himyarites, in the Indian
Ocean. The home of these latter was the part of the
Semitic mainland bordering on Oceania, and most
favourably or centrally situated as to the two branches
of it, the west and the east, Madagascar and Malaysia.
Even up to modern times, the main part of the trade
of the east coast of Africa, as far as Madagascar, was
in the hands of the Arabs of Oman, and the Imam of
Muscat had quite a fleet. From the time of Solomon,
at least, till the present day, there has been unbroken
trading intercourse between Arabia and India. So
far as we know, the whole trade of the Indian Ocean,
from the very first, and for ages, was in the hands of
the Semites. " The Southern Arabians carried on all
the commerce of Egypt, Palestine, and Arabia with
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
ANCIENT HISTORY AND OCEANIC TRADITION. 215
India until shortly before our era. . . , The
Bed Sea, therefore, was most probably the sea of the
red men." Himyer, Ophir, Seba or Saba, and Phoeni-
cian, all mean the ".red man,*' or Semite. Hence the
Indian Ocean was called the Red Sea, Bar Ophir, Mare
Rubrum, the Erythraean Sea. This "Red Sea"
(Indian Ocean) was the naval school of the Semitic-
speaking race, for from it (Herodotus) " the Phoeni-
cians emigrated to the Mediterranean." "It adds a
link to the curious chain of emigration of the Phceni-
cians from the Yemen to Syria, Tyre, and Sidon, the
shores and islands of the Mediterranean, especially
the African coasts of that sea, and to Spain and the
far distant northerly ports of their commerce ; as
distant and across oceans as terrible by their Himyarite
brethren in the Indian and Chinese Seas. . . .
All testimony goes to show that, from the earliest
ages, the peoples of Arabia formed colonies in distant
lands, and have not been actuated only by either the
desire of conquest or by religious impulse in their
foreign expeditions; but rather by restlessness and
commercial activity. . . . The Joktanite people of
Southern Arabia have always been, in contradistinction
to the Ismaelite tribes, addicted to a seafaring life.
The latter were caravan merchants ; the former the
chief traders of the Red Sea (Indian Ocean), carry-
ing their commerce to the shores of India, as well
as to the nearer coasts of Africa" {Smith's Bible
Dictionary).
We know that there has always been a trade
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
216 > x-ANIA^
between Malacca or Malaysia and India. But was
the Eastern Archipelago known to the Semitic-speak-
ing race ? How could it be unknown to them, even
if they went no further than India ? But they went
further. According to Gesenius, in the description of
Semitic commerce in Ezekiel xxvii., " the Indian
Archipelago is to be understood" by the "isles" in
verse 15. I am aware of the nonsense that has been
hazarded as to the situation of Ophir, to which the
fleets of Solomon went in eighteen months* voyages
close on 3,000 years ago. But Raleigh (Histoid of
the Wmid), who exposes to ridicule the idea of Arias
Montanus of Ophir being Peru, by observing that
" Peru" is not the name of any American land at all,
but the native American word for " water," a stream
of which the Spaniards happened to point across
when asking the aboriginals the name of the country
— (so Yucatan, he adds, which Montanus says is from
Yoctan, means, in the language of the savages,
" What say you ?" and is not the name of any coun-
try) — believed Ophir to be the Moluccas. Joseph us,
the Jewish historian, declares for Malacca, which he
calls the Aurea Chersonesus, and his testimony is of
the highest value. The Malays are the Arabs or
Sabaeans of the Eastern Seas. The name of Java,
anciently, it seems, also called Saba, a name carried
perhaps still farther to the east, and found in the
Pacific in Savaii (perhaps Sava-ii — little Sava), is not
at all improbably a monument of the fact that the
first colonists of that queen of the Eastern Archipelago
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
ANCIENT HISTORY AND OCEANIC TRADITION. 217
were Sabseans — that is^ adventurers from the South
Arabian renowned sea-going commercial kingdom of
Saba.
We listen with interest to the words of Sir J.
Emerson Tennent, as given in the second edition
of his valuable work on Ceylon. "In an age," he
says, "before the birth of history, the adventurous
Phoenicians, issuing from the Bed Sea in their ships,
bad reached the shores of India, and centuries after-
wards their experienced seamen piloted the fleets of
Solomon in search of the luxuries of the East.
. . . Qalle is by far the most venerable emporium
of foreign trade now existing in the universe . . .
it seems more than probable that the long sought
locality of Tarshish may be found to be identical
with that of Point de Oalle. Bochart first suggested,
in addition to a western Tarshish, an eastern, near
Ceylon, at Cape Comorin. But subsequent investiga-
tion has served to establish the claim of Malacca to
be the golden land of Solomon. Malacca is the Aurea
Chersonesus of the later Greek geographers; and
Tarshish, which lay in the track between the Arabian
Gulf and Ophir, is recognizable in the great emporium
of Ceylon."
Sir Stamford Baffles, in an appendix to his History
of- Java, quotes from the Manuk Maya of Java (a
book containing their oldest traditions) to show that,
according to their ideas, Java and the eastern islands
obtained their original inhabitants from the "Bed
Sea " in ships. The Portuguese on rounding the Cape
16
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
218 OCEANIA.
of Good Hope found the ships of the Malays by no
means despicable, and Crauf urd remarks of the aver-
age size of the vessels (from 50 to 100 tons) of a
certain Malay fleet said to have voyaged to Arabia,
that " our own shipping that made the circumnaviga-
tion of the globe seventy years later, under Drake,
did not, it should not be forgotten, even equal this
burthen." See above under the word " ship/*
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
MELBOTTRNB :
WALKBB, MAT AND CO., PBINTBRS
9 MACKILLOP-STRBBTT.
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
Digitized by.VjOOQlC
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
Live Music Archive
Librivox Free Audio
Metropolitan Museum
Cleveland Museum of Art
Internet Arcade
Console Living Room
Books to Borrow
Open Library
TV News
Understanding 9/11